You are on page 1of 204

Cat. No.

I515-E1-3

USER’S MANUAL

SYSDRIVE 3G3HV
High-capacity General-purpose Inverter
Thank you for choosing this SYSDRIVE 3G3HV-series product. Proper use and
handling of the product will ensure proper product performance, will length
product life, and may prevent possible accidents.
Please read this manual thoroughly and handle and operate the product with care.

NOTICE
1. This manual describes the functions of the product and relations with other prod-
ucts. You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible.
2. Although care has been given in documenting the product, please contact your
OMRON representative if you have any suggestions on improving this manual.
3. The product contains potentially dangerous parts under the cover. Do not attempt
to open the cover under any circumstances. Doing so may result in injury or death
and may damage the product. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the product.
4. We recommend that you add the following precautions to any instruction manuals
you prepare for the system into which the product is being installed.
S Precautions on the dangers of high-voltage equipment.
S Precautions on touching the terminals of the product even after power has been
turned off. (These terminals are live even with the power turned off.)
5. Specifications and functions may be changed without notice in order to improve
product performance.

Items to Check Before Unpacking


1. Check the following items before removing the product from the package:
S Has the correct product been delivered (i.e., the correct model number and speci-
fications)?
S Has the product been damaged in shipping?
S Are any screws or bolts loose?
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified
operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual.
Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in
injury to people or damage to property.

! DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.

! WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.

! Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury, or property damage.

OMRON Product References


All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when
it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name
of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products,
often means “word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation
for anything else.

Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different
types of information.

Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.

 OMRON, 1996
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual
is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Never-
theless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for dam-
ages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
General Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the SYSDRIVE Inverters and peripheral
devices.
This manual may include illustrations of the product with protective covers removed in order
to describe the components of the product in detail. Make sure that these protective covers
are on the product before use.
Consult your OMRON representative when using the product after a long period of storage.
! WARNING Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

! WARNING Operation, maintenance, or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the
power supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) are OFF,
and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock.

! WARNING Do not damage, pull on, apply stress to, place heavy objects on, or pinch the cables.
Doing so may result in electrical shock.

! WARNING Do not touch the rotating parts of the motor under operation. Doing so may result in
injury.

! WARNING Do not modify the product. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

! Caution Do not store, install, or operate the product in the following places. Doing so may
result in electrical shock, fire or damage to the product.
S Locations subject to direct sunlight.
S Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the
specifications.
S Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
S Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
S Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
S Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
S Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
S Locations subject to shock or vibration.
! Caution Do not touch the Inverter radiator, regenerative resistor, or Servomotor while the
power is being supplied or soon after the power is turned OFF. Doing so may result in
a skin burn due to the hot surface.

! Caution Do not conduct a dielectric strength test on any part of the Inverter. Doing so may
result in damage to the product or malfunction.

! Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the fol-
lowing locations. Not doing so may result in equipment damage.
S Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
S Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields.
S Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
S Locations close to power supplies.
Transportation Precautions
! Caution Do not hold by front cover or panel , instead, hold by the radiation fin (heat sink) while
transporting the product. Doing so may result in injury.

! Caution Do not pull on the cables. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunc-
tion.

! Caution Use the eye-bolts only for transporting the Inverter. Using them for transporting the
machinery may result in injury or malfunction.

Installation Precautions
! WARNING Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (A
holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety.) Not doing so may result in
injury.

! WARNING Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of
operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.

! Caution Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clear-
ances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices. Not doing so
may result in fire or malfunction.

! Caution Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or
malfunction.

! Caution Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or
malfunction.

Wiring Precautions
! WARNING Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been
turned OFF. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

! WARNING Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock or fire.

! WARNING Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not doing
so may result in injury.

! WARNING Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 Ω or less for the 200-V AC
class, or 10 Ω or less for the 400-V AC class. Not connecting to a proper ground may
result in electrical shock.
! Caution Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in
external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.

! Caution Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power sup-
ply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury, or malfunction.

! Caution Connect the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the manual.
Not doing so may result in fire.

! Caution Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to
the product.

! Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in
fire, injury, or damage to the product.

! Caution Do not connect an AC power to the U, V, or W output. Doing so may result in damage
to the product or malfunction.

Operation and Adjustment Precautions


! WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers,
bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Not doing so may result in electrical
shock.

! WARNING Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, or optional
items while the power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or
damage to the product.

! WARNING Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in
electrical shock.

! WARNING Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

! WARNING Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the
machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Doing so may result in injury.

! WARNING Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power
interruption to avoid an unexpected restart (if operation is set to be continued in the
processing selection function after momentary power interruption is reset). Doing so
may result in injury.

! WARNING Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator
is valid only when function settings are performed. Not doing so may result in injury.
! WARNING Be sure confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before turning ON the power
supply, resetting the alarm, or switching the LOCAL/REMOTE selector. Doing so
while the RUN signal is turned ON may result in injury.

! Caution Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation
because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not doing so
may result in damage to the product.

! Caution Provide a separate holding brake when necessary. Not doing so may result in injury.

! Caution Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury or dam-
age to the product.

! Caution Do not carelessly change settings. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the
product.

Maintenance and Inspection Precautions


! WARNING Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied.

! WARNING Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power
supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is turned OFF,
and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock.

! WARNING Maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed by authorized


personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury.

! WARNING Do not attempt to take the Unit apart or repair. Doing either of these may result in
electrical shock or injury.

! Caution Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless
handling may result in malfunction.

! Caution Do not change wiring, disconnect connectors, the Operator, or optional items, or
replace fans while power is being supplied. Doing so may result in injury, damage to
the product, or malfunction.
Warning Labels
Warning labels are pasted on the product as shown in the following illustration. Be sure to
follow the instructions given there.

H Warning Labels

Warning label

H Contents of Warning
Checking Before Unpacking
H Checking the Product
On delivery, always check that the delivered product is the SYSDRIVE 3G3HV Inverter that you
ordered.
Should you find any problems with the product, immediately contact your nearest local sales
representative.

D Checking the Nameplate


Inverter model
Input specifications
Output specifications

D Checking the Model


3G3HV-A2037-CUE

Applicable standards
Maximum applicable motor capacity
Voltage class
Enclosure rating
Series name: 3G3HV Series

Specification
(non) Japanese models
-E English models
-CE Conforms to EN standards
-CUE Conforms to EN and UL/cUL
standards
Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity
037 3.7 kW
055 5.5 kW
075 7.5 kW
110 11 kW
150 15 kW
185 18.5 kW
220 22 kW
300 30 kW
370 37 kW
450 45 kW
550 55 kW
750 75 kW
11K 110 kW
16K 160 kW
18K 185 kW
22K 220 kW
30K 300 kW

Voltage Class
2 Three-phase 200-V AC input (200-V class)
4 Three-phase 400-V AC input (400-V class)

Enclosure Rating
A Panel-mounting (IP10 min.) or closed wall-mounting model
B Panel-mounting (IP00)

D Checking for Damage


Check the overall appearance and check for damage or scratches resulting from transportation. Check
that parts connected by screws are securely fastened.

H Checking the Accessories


Note that this manual is the only accessory provided with the 3G3HV. Set screws and other necessary
parts must be provided by the user.
About this Manual
This manual is divided into the chapters described in the following table. Information is organized by
application area to enable you to use the manual more efficiently.
Chapter Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction Describes functions and nomenclature.
Chapter 2 Installation Provides dimensions, installation methods, and wiring methods.
Chapter 3 Preparing for Operation Describes procedures required for preparing the Inverter and Digital
Operator for operation. It is divided into the following areas:
Preparation Procedure
Outlines the procedures required to use the Inverter from purchase
right up to actual operation.
Using the Digital Operator
Describes the nomenclature, operating methods, such as Digital
Operator key operations, and monitor functions.
Test Run
Describes how to perform a test run using the Digital Operator to
confirm operation for the Inverter and the system in which it is to be
used.
Basic Operation
Describes the functions used for the basic control. The functions
described here are the minimum required for running a motor with an
Inverter.
Applied Operation
Describes all the applied functions that are available with the Inverter.
This includes explanations for functions that can be used to improve
the responsiveness (torque characteristic) and the speed accuracy, as
well as additional functions such as PID control and overtorque
detection.
Chapter 4 Operation Provides information related to Inverter maintenance. This includes
possible causes and countermeasures for errors, as well as inspection
procedures.
Chapter 5 Specifications Provides Inverter specifications, as well as the specifications and
dimensions of peripheral devices.
Chapter 6 Appendix Provides notes on using the Inverter on a motor and gives a list of
standard models. It also provides ordered lists of parameters for easy
reference. The parameter lists include page references.
Table of Contents

Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1


1-1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-3 Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Chapter 2. Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


2-1 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1-1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-1-2 Installation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-2-1 Removing and Mounting the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-2-2 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2-2-3 Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2-2-4 Wiring Around the Main Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2-2-5 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Chapter 3. Preparing for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1


3-1 Preparation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-2 Using the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-2-1 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-2-2 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3-3 Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-4 Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-5 Applied Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3-5-1 Energy-saving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3-5-2 PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3-5-3 List of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3-5-4 Parameters in Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54

Chapter 4. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1


4-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-3 Maintenance and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Chapter 5. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1


5-1 Specifications of Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 Specifications of Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-2-1 Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5-2-2 3G3HV-PCMA2 Voltage/Current Conversion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5-2-3 K3TJ-V11j Scaling Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-2-4 3G3IV-PJVOP96j Analog Operator (Standard Model with Steel Casing) . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-2-5 3G3IV-PJVOP95j Analog Operator (Miniature Model with Plastic Casing) . . . . . . 5-9
5-2-6 3G3IV-PCDBRjB Braking Unit (Yaskawa Electric) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-2-7 3G3IV-PLKEBj Braking Resistor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-2-8 3G3HV-PUZDABjAjMH DC Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-2-9 3G3IV-PUZBABjAjMH AC Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-2-10 Simple Input Noise Filter and Input Noise Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-2-11 3G3IV-PLFj Output Noise Filter (Tokin Corp.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Table of Contents

Chapter 6. Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1


6-1 Notes on Using the Inverter for a Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2 List of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1


1
Chapter 1

Introduction
1-1 Function
1-2 Nomenclature
1-3 Additional Functions
Introduction Chapter 1

1-1 Function

The 3G3HV High-capacity General-purpose Inverter is an easy-to-use inverter that has


advanced features, such as PID control and energy-saving operations.

H SYSDRIVE 3G3HV Inverter Models


• The following 200- and 400-V class 3G3HV Inverter models are available.

• A total of 21 types of Inverter are available for maximum applicable motor capacities of 0.4 to 300 kW.

Voltage class Protective structure Maximum applied motor Model


capacity
200-V Class NEMA1 type 3.7 kW 3G3HV-A2037-E
(3-phase) 5.5 kW 3G3HV-A2055-E
7.5 kW 3G3HV-A2075-E
11 kW 3G3HV-A2110-E
15 kW 3G3HV-A2150-E
Open chassis type 18.5 kW 3G3HV-B2185-E
22 kW 3G3HV-B2220-E
30 kW 3G3HV-B2300-E
37 kW 3G3HV-B2370-E
45 kW 3G3HV-B2450-E
55 kW 3G3HV-B2550-E
75 kW 3G3HV-B2750-E
400-V Class NEMA1 type 3.7 kW 3G3HV-A4037-E
(3-phase) 5.5 kW 3G3HV-A4055-E
7.5 kW 3G3HV-A4075-E
11 kW 3G3HV-A4110-E
15 kW 3G3HV-A4150-E
Open chassis type 18.5 kW 3G3HV-B4185-E
22 kW 3G3HV-B4220-E
30 kW 3G3HV-B4300-E
37 kW 3G3HV-B4370-E
45 kW 3G3HV-B4450-E
55 kW 3G3HV-B4550-E
75 kW 3G3HV-B4750-E
110 kW 3G3HV-B411K-E
160 kW 3G3HV-B416K-E
185 kW 3G3HV-B418K-E
220 kW 3G3HV-B422K-E
300 kW 3G3HV-B430K-E

1-2
Introduction Chapter 1

H Energy-saving Operation
• The rotation speed of a three-phase induction motor does not decrease when the supply voltage
drops if the motor has a light load. The 3G3HV Inverter in energy-saving operation automatically de-
tects the current consumption of the motor connected to the Inverter, estimates its load, and drops the
output voltage, thus saving the power consumption of the motor efficiently.
• Use the auto-tuning function of the Inverter in energy-saving mode to reduce the power consumption
of the motor most efficiently if the ratings of the motor are unknown.
• The Inverter in energy-saving mode is ideal for the following applications.
S Rotation control of fans and blowers
S Flow control of pumps
S Control of machines with variable loads, such as metal-working machines, wood-working ma-
chines, and food-processing machines
S Control of machines that mainly operate with light loads

H PID Control
• The Inverter has a PID control function, thus performing follow-up control with ease.
• Follow-up control is a control method in which the Inverter uses a sensor and senses the rotation
speed of the motor and changes the output frequency to control the rotation speed of the motor.
• Follow-up control can be applied to a variety of control operations.
• PID control is ideal for the following applications.
S Speed control: With a speed sensor, such as a tachometric generator, the Inverter regu-
lates the rotation speed of the motor regardless of the load of the motor or
synchronizes the rotation speed of the motor with that of another motor.
S Pressure control: With a pressure sensor, the Inverter performs constant pressure control.
S Current control: With a current sensor, the Inverter performs precise current control.
S Temperature control: With a temperature sensor and fan, the Inverter performs temperature con-
trol.

H Frequency Reference
• The following three types of frequency references are possible to control the output frequency of the
Inverter.
S Numeric input from the Digital Operator of the Inverter
S Voltage input within a range from 0 to 10 V
S Current input within a range from 4 to 20 mA
The Inverter can use one of the above if it is designated with parameters.
• A maximum of four frequency references can be registered with the Inverter. With remote multi-step
input, the Inverter can be in multi-step speed operation with a maximum of four speed steps.

H Frequency Jump
• The frequency jump function prevents the Inverter from generating any frequency that causes the ma-
chine to resonate.

1-3
Introduction Chapter 1

H Acceleration/Deceleration Time Settings


• The acceleration time and deceleration time of the Inverter can be set independently within a range of
0.0 to 3,600 s.
• Two acceleration times and two deceleration times can be set with the Inverter, any of which can be
selected with remote output.

H V/f Settings
• Select a V/f pattern out of the 15 V/f patterns preset with the Inverter according to the application.
• An optional V/f pattern can be set with the Inverter.

H Monitor Function
• The following items can be monitored with the Digital Operator.
Frequency reference, output frequency, output current, output voltage, DC voltage, output power,
status of input terminals, inverter status, power interruption error, PROM number, total operating
time, and PID feedback value

H Low Noise (3.7- to 160-kW Models)


• The output transistor of the Inverter is an IGBT (insulated gate bipolar transistor). Using a sine-wave
PWM method with a high-frequency carrier, the motor does not generate metallic noise.

H High Torque at Low Output Frequency Range


• A torque rate of 150% can be achieved even in a low speed range where output frequency is only 3 Hz.

H Automatic Torque Boost


• The Inverter automatically adjusts the output according to the required torque of the motor that is rotat-
ing at constant or accelerative speed, thus ensuring the powerful rotation of the motor.

H Harmonic Countermeasures (3.7- to 160-kW Models)


• DC reactors (optional) can be connected to 3.7- to 15-kW models.
• Models of 18.5- to 160-kW have a built-in DC reactor and also employ 12-pulse rectification, which
suppresses harmonics better than a reactor.

1-4
Introduction Chapter 1

1-2 Nomenclature

H Panel
Protection cover (top and bottom)

Mounting hole

Heat sink

Digital Operator

Front cover

Terminals

1-5
Introduction Chapter 1
D Terminals (with Front Cover Removed)

Example: 200-V Class Inverter with 3.7-kW Output

Control
circuit
terminals

Main circuit
terminals
Power input Braking Resistor Motor output

H Digital Operator
Operation Mode Indicators
External Operation:
REMOTE
Lit when operating references from exter-
SEQ REF
nal terminals are in effect.
Analog Input:
Lit when high-frequency references from
external analog terminals are in effect.

Data Display
Displays frequency reference, out-
put frequency, output current,
Fref Fout Iout kWout constant set values, Inverter status,
etc.
F/R Montr Accel Decel
Easy-setting indicators
Displays basic parameter Vmtr V/F Fgain Fbias
Enter Key
constants and monitor items. FLA PID kWsav PRGM
Enters set value when pressed after
constant has been set.

DIGITAL OPERATOR PJVOP131E


Increment Key
Mode Key Increments numbers when pressed
Switches basic parameter during setting of constant number
constant and monitor items. and constant data.
Decrement Key
Operation Mode Selection Key Decrements numbers when
LOCAL pressed during setting of constant
Switches between operation by
the Digital Operator and operation REMOTE number and constant data.
specified in the operation mode
selection parameter (n002). STOP Stop/Reset Key
RUN Stops the Inverter. Also resets after
RESET
alarm has been generated. (See note.)
Run Key
Starts the Inverter.

Note For safety reasons, the reset function cannot be used while the run command (forward/reverse) is
being input. Turn the run command OFF before using the reset function.

1-6
Introduction Chapter 1

1-3 Additional Functions

New functions have been added to the following versions, for which production was
started in April 1997.
3.7 to 15-kW models: Software version S2011 (VSP102011) or later
18.5 to 55-kW models: Software version S3012 (VSP103012) or later
Note: The software version can be confirmed by viewing the 4-digit PROM number with
the monitor function. This number is set to the number of the software version.
The functions that have been added with these versions and outlines of these functions
are given below. For details of the functions, refer to Section 4 Operation.

H Independent Initialization for Motor Rotation Direction


Although the functionality of the forward/reverse rotation selection parameter (n005) itself has not been
changed, with new models it will not be initialized when the parameter write prohibit selection/parame-
ter initialization parameter (n001) is set to 6 or 7.

H V/f Default Settings Changed (Inverters of 55 kW or More)


The default settings for V/f patterns have been changed for the Inverters of 55 kW or more as shown
below.
Model Intermediate output frequency Minimum output frequency
voltage (n016) voltage (n018)
3G3HV-A2550 12.0 V 6.0 V
3G3HV-A4550 24.0 V 12.0 V

H Output Frequency Upper Limit Changed


The upper limit of the setting range for the output frequency upper limit parameter (n030) has been
changed. The addition of a slip compensation function means that frequencies greater than the maxi-
mum frequency (n012) may occur (because the frequency reference is added to the compensation
value). For this reason, the upper limit of the setting range of the output frequency upper limit parameter
(n030) has been increased from 100% to 109%.

H PID Input Characteristic Selection Function (n039)


A PID input characteristic selection input (set value: 27) function has been added to the multi-function
input 5 parameter (n039) that determines the function of terminal S6.

H Carrier Frequency Settings Increased (n050)


The setting 7.0 Hz (set value: 10) has been added to the available carrier frequency settings.

H Minimum Baseblock Time Setting Range Increased (n053)


The setting range for the minimum baseblock time has been increased from the range 0.5 to 5.0 s to the
range 0.5 to10.0 s for increased motor responsiveness.

1-7
Introduction Chapter 1

H Slip Compensation Function (n109 to n111)


A function that compensates for motor slip, a characteristic of induction motors, has been added. Using
this function, the amount of slip is estimated from the output current of the Inverter, and the output fre-
quency is compensated accordingly. By using the slip compensation function, speed fluctuations of the
load can be reduced more effectively than with previous models.

H Changing Parameters while Inverter is Running


It is now possible to change some parameters and, related to this, monitor and set the items in the bot-
tom two lines of easy-setting indicators while the Inverter is running. Using this feature, set values for
some parameters can be adjusted while monitoring operation. For details of which parameters can be
changed while the Inverter is running, refer to the parameter lists.

H Operation Selection at Digital Operator Interruption Function (n112)


A function that detects communications errors between the Digital Operator and the Inverter itself, and
interrupts Inverter outputs has been added.

H Settable Detection Width (n113)


The detection width of the optional frequency agreement and the optical frequency detection can be set
with parameters. With previous models this setting was fixed.

H Operation Selection at Operation Mode Switching (Local/Remote


Switching) (n114)
Using the Operation Mode Selection Key on the Digital Operator or operation mode selection input set
using the multi-function input parameters (set value: 5), it is possible to switch between operation from
the Digital Operator and operation according to the setting of the operation mode selection parameter
(n002). A function that selects whether run signals input while the operation mode is switching are
enabled or disabled after the mode has changed, has been added.

Note If this setting is set to enable run commands, when the operation mode changes the Inverter will
start running immediately. Take steps to ensure safety for such operation.

1-8
2
Chapter 2

Installation
2-1 Mounting
2-2 Wiring
Installation Chapter 2

2-1 Mounting
2-1-1 Dimensions
H 3G3HV-A2037/-A4037
D External Dimensions D Mounting Dimensions
Two, 5.5-dia.
Four, M5

H 3G3HV-A2055/-A2075/-A4055/-A4075
D External Dimensions D Mounting Dimensions
Two, 7-dia. Four, M5

2-2
Installation Chapter 2

H 3G3HV-A2110/-A2150/-A4110/-A4150
D External Dimensions D Mounting Dimensions
Two, 7-dia. Four, M5

Note *The dashed lines apply only to the A2150.

H 3G3HV-B2185/-B2220/-B4185/-B4220/-B4300/-B4450
D External Dimensions D Mounting Dimensions
Four, M5

Voltage class Model 3G3HV- Dimensions (mm)


H H1 D1
200-V B2185/B2220 450 435 174.5
400-V B4185/B4220 450 435 174.5
B4300/B4370/B4450 526 610 175

2-3
Installation Chapter 2

H 3G3HV-B2300/-B2370/-B2450/-B2550/-B4550/-B4750
D External Dimensions D Mounting Dimensions
Two, 12-dia. Four, M10

Voltage class Model 3G3HV- Dimensions (mm)


W H W1 H1
200-V B2300/B2370 425 675 320 650
B2450/B2550 475 800 370 775
400-V B4550/B4750 455 820 350 795

2-4
Installation Chapter 2

H 3G3HV-B2750/-B411K/-B416K
D External Dimensions D Mounting Dimensions
Two, 14 dia.

Four, M12

Voltage class Model 3G3HV- Dimensions (mm)


D D2 W2
200-V B2750 400 max. 158 695
400-V B411K 375 max. 130 695
B416K 400 max. 158 695

2-5
Installation Chapter 2

H 3G3HV-B418K/-B422K
D External Dimensions D Mounting Dimensions
Six, 14 dia.
Six, M12

H 3G3HV-B430K
D External Dimensions D Mounting Dimensions
Six, 14 dia. Six, M12

2-6
Installation Chapter 2
D Digital Operator Installation

4 Two, 4 dia.
Panel face

Panel cutout
(for cables)

39

16
125

8 8

Front side of panel Back side of panel

4 27 18.8 30 min.

2-1-2 Installation Conditions

H Cautions and Warnings

! WARNING Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (A
holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety.) Not doing so may result in
injury.

! WARNING Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of
operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.

! Caution Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clear-
ances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices. Not doing so
may result in fire or malfunction.

! Caution Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or
malfunction.

! Caution Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or
malfunction.

2-7
Installation Chapter 2

H Direction and Space


• Install the Inverter on a vertical surface so that the characters on the nameplate are oriented upward.
• When installing the Inverter, always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dis-
sipation from the Inverter.

W = 30 mm min. 120 mm min. Air

Inverter Inverter Inverter Side

120 mm min. Air

H Installation Site
• Install the Inverter under the following conditions.

NEMA1 Type
Ambient temperature for operation: –10 to 40°C
Humidity: 90% RH or less (no condensation)

Open Chassis Type


Ambient temperature for operation: –10 to 45°C
Humidity: 90% RH or less (no condensation)
Note A protection cover is attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protec-
tion covers before installing the 200- or 400-V Class Inverter that has an output of 15 kW or less to
a panel.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. Alternatively, install it in a totally en-
closed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
• When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or
other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
• Do not install the Inverter on inflammable material such as wood.

H Ambient Temperature Control


• To enhance operation reliability, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme
temperature rises.
• If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment such as a box, use a cooling fan or air conditioner
to maintain the internal air temperature below 45°C.

2-8
Installation Chapter 2

H Protecting Inverter from Foreign Matter during Installation


• Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.
• Upon completion of installation, always remove the cover from the Inverter. Otherwise, ventilation will
be affected, causing the Inverter to overheat.

2-9
Installation Chapter 2

2-2 Wiring

! WARNING Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been
turned OFF. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

! WARNING Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock or fire.

! WARNING Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not doing
so may result in injury.

! WARNING Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 Ω or less for the 200-V AC
class, or 10 Ω or less for the 400-V AC class. Not connecting to a proper ground may
result in electrical shock.

! Caution Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in
external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.

! Caution Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power sup-
ply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury, or malfunction.

! Caution Connect the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the manual.
Not doing so may result in fire.

! Caution Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to
the product.

! Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in
fire, injury, or damage to the product.

! Caution Do not connect an AC power to the U, V, or W output. Doing so may result in damage
to the product or malfunction.

2-10
Installation Chapter 2

2-2-1 Removing and Mounting the Front Cover

Remove the front cover to wire the terminals. Remove the Digital Operator from the front
cover before removing the front cover. Do not remove or mount the front cover without
first removing the Digital Operator, otherwise Digital Operator may malfunction due to
imperfect contact.

H Removing the Digital Operator


• Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the arrow 1 direction to unlock the Digital Opera-
tor and lift the Digital Operator in the arrow 2 direction to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the
following illustration.

H Removing the Front Cover


• Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the arrow 1 directions and lift the bottom of the cover
in the arrow 2 direction to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.

2-11
Installation Chapter 2

H Mounting the Front Cover


• Mount the front cover to the Inverter by taking in reverse order to the steps to remove the front cover
after wiring the terminals.
• Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover, otherwise Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
• Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part
of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.

H Attaching the Digital Operator


• Hook the Digital Operator on clicks A of the front cover in the arrow 1 direction as shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
• Press the Digital Operator in the arrow 2 direction until it snaps shut with clicks B.

Clicks A

Clicks B

Note Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods
other than those mentioned above, otherwise the Inverter may malfunction due to imperfect con-
tact or break.

H Removing the Front Cover of the Inverter with 18.5-kW Output or More
• The front cover can be removed without removing the Digital Operator from the Inverter provided that
the Inverter is a model with an output of 18.5 kW or more.
• Loosen the four screws of the front cover and move the front cover slightly upwards to remove the front
cover.

2-12
Installation Chapter 2

2-2-2 Terminals

H Terminal Block Configuration (200-V Class with 3.7-kW Output)

Control
circuit
terminals

Main circuit
terminals
Power input Braking Resistor Motor output

H Main Circuit Terminals

D 200-V Class
Model 3G3HV- A2037 to A2075 A2110 to A2150 B2185 to B2750
Maximum 3.7 to 7.5 kW 11 to 15 kW 18.5 to 75 kW
applied motor
capacity
L1 (R) Power supply input terminals, 3-phase, 200 to 230 VAC, Power supply input
L2 (S) 50/60 Hz terminals, 3-phase, 200 to
230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
L3 (T)
L11 (R1) ---
L21 (S1)
L31 (T1)
T1 (U) Motor output terminals, 3-phase, 200 to 230 VAC (correspond to input voltage)
T2 (V)
T3 (W)
B1 Braking Resistor Unit ---
B2 connection terminals
+ 1 DC reactor connection DC reactor connection ---
terminal ( + 1- + 2) terminal ( + 1- + 2)
+ 2
DC power supply input DC power supply input
– terminal ( + 1- – ) terminal ( + 1- – )
Braking Unit connection
+ 3 --- terminal ( + 3- – )
Ground the terminal at a resistance of less than 100 Ω.

2-13
Installation Chapter 2
D 400-V Class
Model 3G3HV- A4037 to A4150 B4185 to B416K B418K to B430K
Maximum 3.7 to 15 kW 18.5 to 160 kW 185 to 300 kW
applied motor
capacity
L1 (R) Power supply input Power supply input Power supply input
L2 (S) terminals, 3-phase, 380 to terminals, 3-phase, 380 to terminals, 3-phase, 380 to
460 VAC, 50/60 Hz 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz
L3 (T)
L11 (R1) --- ---
L21 (S1)
L31 (T1)
T1 (U) Motor output terminals, 3-phase, 380 to 460 VAC (correspond to input voltage)
T2 (V)
T3 (W)
B1 Braking Resistor Unit ---
B2 connection terminals
+ 1 DC reactor connection --- DC power supply input
terminal ( + 1- + 2) terminal ( + 1- – )
+ 2 DC power supply input ---
terminal ( + 1- – )
– Braking Unit connection
terminal ( + 3- – )
+ 3 ---
Ground the terminal at a resistance of less than 10 Ω.

2-14
Installation Chapter 2

H Control Circuit Terminals for All 3G3HV Models


Symbol Name Function Signal level
Input S1 Forward run/Stop Stops at OFF. Photocoupler
S2 Multi-function input 1 (S2) Set by constant n035 (reverse run/stop). 24 VDC, 8 mA
S3 Multi-function input 2 (S3) Set by constant n036 (external error a).
S4 Multi-function input 3 (S4) Set by constant n037 (error reset).
S5 Multi-function input 4 (S5) Set by constant n038 (multi-step speed
reference 1).
S6 Multi-function input 5 (S6) Set by constant n039 (multi-step speed
reference 2).
SC Sequence input common Common for S1 to S6.
FS Frequency reference power supply DC power supply for frequency reference. 15 VDC, 20 mA
FV Frequency reference input (voltage) Voltage input terminal for frequency refer- 0 to 10 VDC (In-
ence. put impedance:
20 kΩ)
FI Frequency reference input (current) Current input terminal for frequency refer- 4 to 20 mA (In-
ence. put impedance:
250 kΩ)
FC Frequency reference input common Common for FV, F1. ---
E Shielded wire connection ground Shielded terminal for sequence and fre- ---
(G) quency reference inputs. (see note 2)
Output MA Multi-function contact output 1 (normally Set by constant n040 (error) Contact output
open) 30 VDC, 1 A
MB Multi-function contact output 1 (normally max.
closed) 250 VAC, 1 A
max.
MC Multi-function contact output 1 common Common for MA, MB
M1 Multi-function contact output 2 (normally Set by constant n041 (running)
open)
M2 Multi-function contact output 2 common Common for M1
AM Multi-function analog output Set by constant n048 (output frequency) 0 to 10 VDC,
AC Multi-function analog output common Common for AM 2 mA

Note 1. Parameter settings can be used to select various functions for multi-function inputs 1 to 5 and
the multi-function contact output.
The functions in parentheses are the default settings.
Note 2. Do not connect a grounding wire to the E (G) terminal. Connect the grounding wire to the
ground terminal of the main circuit terminals.

2-15
Installation Chapter 2

2-2-3 Standard Connection Diagram

D For Inverter Models of 200- to 400-V Class with 3.7- to 15-kW Output
DC reactor (External Braking Resistor Unit
connection possible) (see note) (optional)

Three-phase, Three-phase induction


200 (400) VAC motor
L1 (R) T1 (U)
L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (T) T3 (W)
Forward rotation/Stop
Multi-function Multi-function contact output 1
input 1
Multi-function
(Normally open contact)
input 2 (Normally closed contact)
Multi-function
input 3
Multi-function
Common
input 4
Multi-function Multi-function contact output 2
input 5
Common
Common

Multi-function analog output


Shielded wire
Common Voltmeter
Variable resistor for
frequency reference
(voltage input)
(2 kΩ, 1/4 W min.)
Frequency reference
(current input)

Note: These terminals of the 3G3HV-A2110 and 3G3HV-A2150


connect to the Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit.

D Example of Wiring for 3-wire Sequential Operation


Stop switch Operation switch
(NC) (NO)
Run command (Operates when the
operation switch is closed)
Stop command (Stops when the stop
switch is open)
Forward/Reverse rotation command

2-16
Installation Chapter 2
D For Inverter Models of 200- to 400-V Class with 18.5- to 300-kW Output
Three-phase, Three-phase induction
200 (400) VAC motor
L1 (R) T1 (U)
L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (T) T3 (W)
Forward rotation/Stop
L11 (R1)
L21 (S1) See note 3
L31 (T1) Multi-function contact output 1
Multi-function (Normally open contact)
input 1 (Normally closed contact)
Multi-function
input 2
Common
Multi-function
input 3
Multi-function Multi-function contact output 2
input 4
Multi-function
Common
input 5
Common Multi-function analog output
Common Voltmeter
Shielded wire

Variable resistor for


frequency reference
(voltage input)
Frequency reference
(current input)

Note 1. The Braking Unit or Braking Resistor Unit cannot be connected to the Inverter
(18.5 kW to 160 kW). However, 185-kW to 300-kW models can be connected.
Note 2. Make sure that terminals R and R1, S and S1, and T and T1 are short-circuited.
These terminals are short-circuited with short bars before shipping. Be sure to re-
move the short bars, however, when using 12-pulse rectification.
Note 3. Terminals L11 (R1), L21 (S1), and L31 (T1) are not available on the 185- to 300-kW
Inverters.
Note 4. The 185- to 300-kW Inverters do not have built-in DC reactors, nor can DC reactors
be externally connected.

D Example of Wiring for 3-wire Sequential Operation


Stop switch Operation switch
(NC) (NO)
Run command (Operates when the
operation switch is closed)
Stop command (Stops when the stop
switch is open)
Forward/Reverse rotation command

2-17
Installation Chapter 2

2-2-4 Wiring Around the Main Circuit

System reliability and noise resistance are affected by the wiring method used. There-
fore, always follow the instructions given below when connecting the Inverter to periph-
eral devices and other parts.

H Wire Size and Round Solderless Terminal


For the main circuit and ground, always use 600-V polyvinyl chloride (PVC) cables.
If the cable is long and may cause voltage drops, increase the wire size according to the cable length.

D Wire Sizes
Voltage class Model Terminal Terminal Wire
screw thickness
(mm2)
200-V Class 3G3HV-A2037 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M4 5.5

3G3HV-A2055 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M5 8
5.5 to 8
3G3HV-A2075 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M5 8
5.5 to 8
3G3HV-A2110 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M6 22
8
3G3HV-A2150 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M8 30
M6 8
3G3HV-B2185 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M8 30
14
3G3HV-B2220 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M8 38
14
3G3HV-B2300 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M10 100
M8 22
3G3HV-B2370 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M10 60 x 2P
M8 22
3G3HV-B2450 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M10 60 x 2P
M8 22
3G3HV-B2550 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M10 60 x 2P
M8 30
3G3HV-B2750 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M12 100 x 2P
M8 50

2-18
Installation Chapter 2

Voltage class Model Terminal Terminal Wire


screw thickness
(mm2)

400-V Class 3G3HV-A4037 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M4 2 to 5.5
3.5 to 5.5
3G3HV-A4055 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M4 3.5 to 5.5

3G3HV-A4075 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M4 5.5

3G3HV-A4110 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M5 8 to 14
M6 8
3G3HV-A4150 L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)2, B1, B2, T1, T2, T3 M5 8 to 14
M6 8
3G3HV-B4185 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M6 14
M8 8

400-V Class 3G3HV-B4220 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M6 22
M8 8
3G3HV-B4300 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M8 22
8
3G3HV-B4370 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M8 30
14
3G3HV-B4450 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M8 50
14
3G3HV-B4550 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M10 100
M8 22
3G3HV-B4750 L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M10 60 x 2P
M8 22
3G3HV-B411K L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M10 60 x 2P
M8 30
3G3HV-B416K L1, L2, L3, L11, L21, L31, T1, T2, T3 M12 100 x 2P
M8 50
3G3HV-B418K L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M16 325 x 2P
M8 50
3G3HV-B422K L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M16 325 x 2P
M8 60
3G3HV-B430K L1, L2, L3, (–), (+)1, (+)3, T1, T2, T3 M16 325 x 2P
M8 60

Note The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75°C.

2-19
Installation Chapter 2
D Round Solderless Terminals and Tightening Torque
Wire thickness Terminal Size Tightening
(mm2) screw torque (NSm)
0.5 M4 1.25 – 4 1.2
0.75 M4 1.25 – 4 1.2
1.25 M4 1.25 – 4 1.2
2 M4 2–4 1.2
M5 2–5 2.0
M6 2–6 2.5
M8 2–8 6.0
3.5/5.5 M4 5.5 – 4 1.2
M5 5.5 – 5 2.0
M6 5.5 – 6 2.5
M8 5.5 – 8 6.0
8 M5 8–5 2.0
M6 8–6 2.5
M8 8–8 6.0
14 M6 14 – 6 2.5
M8 14 – 8 6.0
22 M6 22 – 6 2.5
M8 22 – 8 6.0
30/38 M8 38 – 8 6.0
50/60 M8 60 – 8 6.0
M10 60 – 10 10.0
80 M10 80 – 10 10.0
100 100 – 10 10.0
100 M12 100 – 12 14.0
150 150 – 12 14.0
200 200 – 12 14.0
325 M12 x 2 325 – 12 14.0
M16 325 – 16 25.0

Note Determining Wire Size


Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated volt-
age.

Line voltage drop is calculated as follows:


Line voltage drop (V) = √3 x wire resistance (Ω/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10–3

2-20
Installation Chapter 2

H Wiring on the Input Side of the Main Circuit

D Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker


Always connect the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) and power supply via a molded case
circuit breaker (MCCB) suitable to the Inverter.
• Install one wiring circuit breaker per Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter’s rated current.
• For the MCCB’s time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter’s overload protection (one min-
ute at 150% of the rated output current).
• If the MCCB is to be used in common among multiple Inverters, or other devices, set up a sequence
such that the power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in the following diagram.

Inverter
Power
supply
3-phase/
Single-phase
200 V AC
3-phase
400 V AC
(See note.)

Fault output (NC)

Note Use a 400/200 V transformer for a 400-V model.

D Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter


Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated.
In general, a leakage current of approximately 100 mA will occur for each Inverter (when the power
cable is 1 m) and approximately 5 mA for each additional meter of power cable.
Therefore, at the power supply input area, use a special-purpose breaker for Inverters, which detects
only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and excludes high-fre-
quency leakage current.
• For the special-purpose breaker for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity
amperage of at least 10 mA per Inverter.
• When using a general leakage breaker, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage
of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.

2-21
Installation Chapter 2
D Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply of the main circuit is to be shut off because of the sequence, a magnetic contactor
can be used instead of a molded-case circuit breaker.
When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to stop a load forcibly,
however, the regenerative braking does not work and the load coasts to a stop.
• A load can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break
down. To maintain the service life of the Inverter’s internal relays and electrolytic capacitors, it is rec-
ommended that this operation be performed no more than once every 30 minutes.
• When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed
after recovery from a power interruption.
• When using the Braking Resistor Unit, be sure to arrange a sequence in which the thermal relay of the
Unit turns the magnetic contactor OFF.

D Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block


Input power supply can be connected to any terminal on the terminal block because the phase
sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3).

D Installing an AC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (660 kW or more) or the phase
advance capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit,
causing the converter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC reactor on the input side of the Inverter.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.

D Installing a Surge Absorber


Always use a surge absorber or diode for the inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads
include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoid, and magnetic brakes.

2-22
Installation Chapter 2
D Installing a Noise Filter on the Power Supply Side
The Inverter’s outputs utilize high-speed switching, so noise may be transmitted from the Inverter to the
power line and adversely affect other devices in the vicinity. It is recommended that a Noise Filter be
installed at the Power Supply to minimize this noise transmission. Conversely, noise can also be re-
duced from the power line to the Inverter.

Wiring Example 1
Input Noise Filters
Simple Input Noise Filter: 3G3EV-PLNFDj
Input Noise Filter: 3G3IV-PFNj
EMC-conforming Input Noise Filter: 3G3FV-PFSj

Power
supply 3G3HV

Noise
Filter SYSDRIVE

SYSMAC or
other control
device

Note Use a noise filter designed for Inverters. A general-purpose noise filter will be less effective and
may not reduce noise.

D Calculating the Inverter’s Input Power Supply Capacity


The power supply capacity for the Inverter can be calculated in the way shown below. The value
obtained should only be as a reference; allow for some degree of variation.
Input power supply capacity (kVA) = Motor output (kW)/(Motor efficiency × Inverter efficiency × Inverter
input power factor)
Motor efficiency = 0.8 (typ.)
Inverter efficiency = 0.9 (typ.)
Inverter input power factor = 0.65 to 0.9
Note The Inverter’s input power factor varies with the impedance. If an AC reactor is used, take the
value to be 0.9, and if an AC reactor is not used, take the value to be 0.65.
To calculate the input current, divide the input power supply capacity obtained above by the input volt-
age. The Inverter has an overload capacity of 150%, and so set to a value 1.5 times the result of this
calculation.
Example: 3-phase 200-V: 1.5 × Input power supply capacity/(√3 × 200 V)
Single-phase 200-V: 1.5 × Input power supply capacity/200 V

D Setting the Power Supply Voltage Short Pin (400-V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or
More)
Set the power supply voltage short pin for 400-V Class Inverters with a capacity of 18.5 kW or more.

Short Pin Setting Procedure


1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least one minute (three minutes for Inverters of 30 kW or
more) before removing the front panel.

2-23
Installation Chapter 2
2. Insert the short pin mounted on the board into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power
supply voltage. The default setting is 440 V.
The following example shows board of a 400-V Class Inverter of 18.5 to 45 kW.

380 V 400/415 V 440 V 460 V

3. Put the front panel to its original position.

H Wiring on the Output Side of Main Circuit

D Connecting the Terminal Block to the Load


Connect output terminals T1 (U), T2 (V), and T3 (W) to motor lead wires T1 (U), T2 (V), and T3 (W),
respectively. Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward command. Switch over any two of
the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward com-
mand.

D Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals


Never connect a power supply to output terminals T1 (U), T2 (V), and T3 (W). If voltage is applied to the
output terminals, the internal circuit of the Inverter will be damaged.

D Never Short or Ground Output Terminals


If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Invert-
er casing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Also, be careful not to
short the output wires.

D Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter


Never to connect a phase advance capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to the output circuit. Doing so may
result in damage to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.

D Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch or Magnetic Contactor


Do not connect an electromagnetic switch or magnetic contactor to the output circuit. If a load is con-
nected to the Inverter during running, an inrush current will actuate the overcurrent protective circuit in
the Inverter.

2-24
Installation Chapter 2
D Installing a Thermal Relay
This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If,
however, more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or multi-polar motor is used, always install a
thermal relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set n033 to 0 (no thermal protection).
In this case, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor on the input side of the main circuit is
turned off by the contact of the thermal relay.

D Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side


Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and induction noise.

Power 3G3HV
supply
Noise filter

Induction
noise Radio noise
Signal line

Controller AM radio

Induction Noise: Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller
to malfunction.
Radio Noise: Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio
receiver to make noise.

D Countermeasures Against Induction Noise


As described previously, a noise filter can be used to prevent induction noise from being generated on
the output side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent induction
noise. Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces induction
noise.

Power 3G3HV Metal pipe


supply

30 cm min.

Signal line

Controller

2-25
Installation Chapter 2
D Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise,
install noise filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel
box. The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.
Steel box

Power 3G3HV Metal pipe


supply
Noise Noise
filter filter

D Cable Length between Inverter and Motor


As the cable length between the Inverter and the motor is increased, the floating capacity between the
Inverter outputs and the ground is increased proportionally. The increase in floating capacity at the In-
verter outputs causes the high-frequency leakage current to increase, and this may adversely affect
peripheral devices and the current detector in the Inverter’s output section. To prevent this from occur-
ring, use a cable of no more than 100 meters between the Inverter and the motor. If the cable must be
longer than 100 meters, take measures to reduce the floating capacity by not wiring in metallic ducts, by
using a separate cable for each phase, and so on.
Also adjust the carrier frequency according to the cable length between the Inverter and the motor, as
shown in the table below.
Cable length 50 m max. 100 m max. More than 100 m
Carrier frequency (n050) 15 kHz max (6 max.) 10 kHz max. (4 max.) 5 kHz max. (2 max.)

Note The carrier frequency setting range varies depending on the Inverter capacity.
200-V class, 22 kW max.; 400-V class, 22 kW max.: 0.4 to 15.0 kHz
200-V class, 30 to 75 kW; 400-V class, 30 to 160 kW: 0.4 to 10.0 kHz
400-V class, 185 to 300 kW: 0.4 to 2.5 kHz

D Single-phase Motors Cannot Be Used


The Inverter is not suited for the variable speed control of single-phase motors.
Single-phase motors are either capacitor start motors or split-phase start motors. (The method for de-
termining rotation direction at startup is different.) If a capacitor start motor is used, the capacitor may be
damaged by a sudden electric discharge caused by Inverter output. If a split-phase start motor is used,
the starting coil may burn because the centrifugal switch does not operate.

2-26
Installation Chapter 2

H Ground Wiring
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200-V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and
that of the 400-V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω.
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or power tools.
• Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and mini-
mize the length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode
and the ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unsta-
ble.
• When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.

2-27
Installation Chapter 2

H Countermeasures against Harmonics


With the continuing development of electronics, the generation of harmonics from industrial machines
has been causing problems recently. Refer to the following for the definition of harmonics (i.e., harmonic
currents with voltages) and countermeasures against the generation of harmonics from the Inverter.

D Harmonics (Harmonic Currents with Voltages)


• Definition
Harmonics consist of electric power produced from AC power and alternating at frequencies that are
integral multiples of the frequency of the AC power.
The following are the harmonic frequencies of a 60- or 50-Hz commercial power supply.
Second harmonic: 120 (100) Hz
Third harmonic: 180 (150) Hz

Second harmonic (120 Hz)


Basic frequency
(60 Hz)

Third harmonic (180 Hz)

• Problems Caused by the Harmonics Generation


The waveform of commercial power supply will be distorted if the commercial power supply contains
excessive harmonic currents.
Machines with such a commercial power supply will malfunction or generate excessive heat.

Basic frequency (60 Hz) Third harmonic (180 Hz)

Distorted current
waveform

D Causes of Harmonics Generation


• Usually, electric machines have built-in circuitry that converts commercial AC power supply into DC
power. Such AC power, however, contains harmonics due to the difference in current flow between AC
and DC.
• Obtaining DC from AC using Rectifiers and Capacitors
DC voltage is obtained by converting AC voltage into a pulsating one-side voltage with rectifiers and
smoothing the pulsating one-side voltage with capacitors. Such AC, however, contains harmonics.

2-28
Installation Chapter 2
• Inverter
The Inverter as well as normal electric machines has an output current containing harmonics because
the Inverter converts AC into DC.
The output current of the Inverter is comparatively high. Therefore, the ratio of harmonics in the output
current of the Inverter is higher than that of any other electric machine.

Voltage

Time

Rectified
Voltage

Time
Smoothed

Voltage

Time
Current
A current flows into the capacitors. The
current is different from the voltage in
waveform. Time

D Countermeasures with Reactors against Harmonics Generation


• DC/AC Reactors
The DC reactor and AC reactor suppress harmonics and currents that change suddenly and greatly.
The DC reactor suppresses harmonics better than the AC reactor. The DC reactor used with the AC
reactor suppresses harmonics more effectively.
The input power factor of the Inverter is improved by suppressing the harmonics in the input current of
the Inverter.

Note 18.5- to 160-kW Inverters have a built-in DC reactor.


185- to 300-kW Inverters cannot use a DC reactor.

• Connection
Connect the DC reactor to the internal DC power supply of the Inverter after shutting off the power
supply to the Inverter and making sure that the charge indicator of the Inverter turns off.

! WARNING Do not touch the internal circuitry of the Inverter in operation, otherwise an electric
shock or a burn injury may occur.

2-29
Installation Chapter 2
• Wiring Method
With DC Reactor

DC reactor
(optional)

200 VAC (400 V)


L1 (R) T1 (U)
L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (T) T3 (W)

3G3HV

Note Be sure to remove the short bar on terminals +1 and +2 before connecting the DC reactor.
With DC and AC Reactors
DC reactor
(optional)

200 VAC (400 V)


L1 (R) T1 (U)
L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (T) T3 (W)

AC reactor
(optional) 3G3HV

Note Be sure to remove the short bar on terminals +1 and +2 before connecting the DC reactor.
• Reactor Effects
Harmonics are effectively suppressed when the DC reactor is used with the AC reactor as shown in
the following table.
Harmonic suppres- Harmonic generation rate (%)
sion method 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23th 25th
harmonic harmonic harmonic harmonic harmonic harmonic harmonic harmonic
No reactor 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8
AC reactor 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
DC reactor 30 13 8.4 5 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
DC and AC reactors 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4

2-30
Installation Chapter 2
D Countermeasures with 12-pulse Rectification against Harmonics Generation
• 12-pulse Rectification
The 3G3HV-series Inverter with an output of 18.5 to 160 kW can employ 12-pulse rectification, which
suppresses harmonics better than reactors. The 3G3HV-series Inverter with an output of 15 kW or
less and 185 kW or more cannot employ 12-pulse rectification.
• Wiring Method

1. Terminals L1 (R) and L11 (R1), L2 (S) and L21 (S1), and L3 (T) and L31 (T1) are short-circuited with
short bars before shipping. Be sure to remove the short bars when employing 12-pulse rectification,
otherwise the Inverter will break down.
2. Do not ground the secondary winding side of the transformer, otherwise the Inverter may break
down.
With Input Transformer for 12-pulse Rectification

Input transformer for 3G3HV


12-pulse rectification

L1 (R) T1 (U)
200 VAC (400 V) L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (T) T3 (W)
L11 (R1)
L21 (S1)
L31 (T1)

With Standard Transformers for 12-pulse Rectification

3G3HV
Star-star insulating
transformer
L1 (R) T1 (U)
200 VAC (400 V) L2 (S) T2 (V)
L3 (T) T3 (W)
L11 (R1)
L21 (S1)
L31 (T1)
Star-delta insulating
transformer

Note Use insulating transformers.

2-31
Installation Chapter 2
• Input Transformers for 12-pulse Rectification
Refer to the following table to select the input transformer for 12-pulse rectification. Refer to the mini-
mum currents on the secondary winding side in the table when selecting two standard transformers
used in combination for 12-pulse rectification.
Inverter model Input voltage (V) Minimum current on Minimum current on
3G3HV- the primary winding the secondary winding
side (A) side (A)
B2185 I/O voltage ratio: 1:1 100 50
B2220 200 to 230 V ±10%/ 120 60
200 to 230 V ±10%
± at
B2300 50/60 Hz 164 82
B2370 200 100
B2450 230 115
B2550 280 140
B2750 380 190
B4185 I/O voltage ratio: 1:1 52 26
B4220 380 to 460 V ±10%/ 66 33
±
380 to 460 V±10% at
B4300 50/60 Hz 82 41
B4370 100 50
B4450 120 60
B4550 180 80
B4750 206 103
B411K 280 140
B416K 380 190

• 12-pulse Rectification Effect


Harmonics are suppressed effectively with 12-pulse rectification as shown in the following table.
Harmonic suppres- Harmonic generation rate (%)
sion method 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23th 25th
harmonic harmonic harmonic harmonic harmonic harmonic harmonic harmonic
No reactor 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8
12-pulse rectification 5.43 5.28 5.40 5.96 0.69 0.19 1.49 1.18

H Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit


• Connect the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to the Inverter as shown in the following.
• Set n079 to 0 (i.e., no overheating protection of the Braking Resistor Unit) and n070 to 0 (i.e., no decel-
erating stall prevention) before using the Inverter with the Braking Resistor Unit connected.

Note 1. Set n079 to 0 before operating the Inverter with the Braking Resistor Unit without thermal
relay trip contacts.
Note 2. The Braking Resistor Unit cannot be used and the deceleration time cannot be shortened by
the Inverter if n070 is set to 1 (i.e., decelerating stall prevention).
• To prevent the Unit from overheating, make a power supply sequence as shown below or connect the
thermal relay trip output of the Unit to the remote error input terminal of the Inverter to interrupt the
operation of the Inverter.
• The Braking Resistor Unit or Braking Unit cannot be connected to the Inverter with an output of
18.5 kW to 160 kW.

2-32
Installation Chapter 2
D 200-V Class with 3.7- to 7.5-kW Output and 400-V Class with 3.7- to 15-kW Output

Braking Resistor Unit

Inverter Thermal relay


trip contact

D 200-V Class with 11- to 15-kW Output and 400-V Class with 185- to 300-kW Output

Control Unit Braking Resistor Unit

Inverter Thermal relay


trip contact

Thermal relay trip contact

D Connecting Braking Units in Parallel


When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel, use the wiring and connectors shown in the
following diagram. There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or
Slave. Select “Master” for the first Braking Unit only; select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from
the second Unit onwards).

Thermal Thermal Thermal


relay trip relay trip relay trip
contact contact contact
Braking Braking Braking
Resistor Resistor Resistor
Unit Unit Unit

Inverter Braking Unit #1 Braking Unit #2 Braking Unit #3

Thermal Thermal Thermal


relay trip relay trip relay trip
contact contact contact

2-33
Installation Chapter 2
D Power Supply Sequence
Power
supply
200-V class: Three-phase, 200 to
230 VAC (50/60 Hz)
400-V class: Three-phase, 380 to
460 VAC (50/60 Hz)
(See note)

Inverter

Note Use a transformer with 200- and 400-V outputs for the power supply of the 400-V Inverter.

2-2-5 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals


A control signal line must be 50 m maximum and separated from power lines. The fre-
quency reference must be input to the Inverter through twisted-pair wires.

H Wire Size and Solderless Terminals


Use thick wires to prevent voltage drops if the wires are long.

D Wires for All Inverter Models


Terminal Terminal Wire thickness (mm2) Type
screw
S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6, SC, --- Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25 Shielded, twisted-pair wire
FV, FI, FS, FC, AM, AC, M1, Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25 Shielded,
M2, MA, MB, MC polyethylene-covered, vinyl
E (G) M3.5 0.5 to 2 sheath cable

D Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals


The use of solderless terminals for the control circuit terminals is recommended because solderless
terminals are easy to connect securely.
d1 dia. Wire thickness Model d1 d2 Manufacturer
0.5 mm2 A1 0.5-8WH 1.00 2.60 Phoenix Contact
0.75 mm2 A1 0.75-8GY 1.20 2.80
1 mm2 A1 1-8RD 1.40 3.00
1.5 mm2 A1 1.5-8BK 1.70 3.50

d2 dia.

2-34
Installation Chapter 2
Note Do not solder wires with the control circuit terminals if wires are used instead of solderless termi-
nals. Wires may not contact well with the control circuit terminals or the wires may be discon-
nected from the control circuit terminals due to vibration if the wires are soldered.

D Round Solderless Terminals for Ground Terminal


Wire thickness Terminal Size
(mm2) screw
0.5 M3.5 1.25 to 3.5
0.75 1.25 to 3.5
1.25 1.25 to 3.5
2 2 to 3.5

H Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

D Wiring Method
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slotted screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.

Note 1. Always separate the control signal line from the main circuit cables and other power cables.
Note 2. Do not solder the wires to the control circuit terminals. The wires may not contact well with the
control circuit terminals if the wires are soldered.
Note 3. The end of each wire connected to the control circuit terminals must be stripped for approxi-
mately 7 mm.
Note 4. Use a shielded wire for the ground terminal.
Note 5. Insulate the shield with tape so that the shield will not touch any signal line or device.
Thin-slotted screwdriver
Blade of screwdriver
Control circuit
terminal block

Strip the end for 7 mm if


no solderless terminal is
used. Solderless terminal or 3.5 mm max.
wire without soldering Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Wires

Note Tighten screws to a torque between 0.5 and 0.6 NSm. Tightening to a torque greater than this may
cause the terminal block to be damaged. Tightening to a torque less than this may result in mal-
function or short-circuiting.

2-35
3
Chapter 3

Preparing for Operation


3-1 Preparation Procedure
3-2 Using the Digital Operator
3-3 Test Run
3-4 Basic Operation
3-5 Applied Operation
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

H Cautions and Warnings


! WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers,
bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Not doing so may result in electrical
shock.

! WARNING Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, or optional
items while the power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or
damage to the product.

! WARNING Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in
electrical shock.

! WARNING Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

! WARNING Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the
machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Doing so may result in injury.

! WARNING Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power
interruption to avoid an unexpected restart (if operation is set to be continued in the
processing selection function after momentary power interruption is reset). Doing so
may result in injury.

! WARNING Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator
is valid only when function settings are performed. Not doing so may result in injury.

! WARNING Be sure confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before turning ON the power
supply, resetting the alarm, or switching the LOCAL/REMOTE selector. Doing so
while the RUN signal is turned ON may result in injury.

! Caution Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation
because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not doing so
may result in damage to the product.

! Caution Provide a separate holding brake when necessary. Not doing so may result in injury.

! Caution Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury or dam-
age to the product.

! Caution Do not carelessly change settings. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the
product.

3-2
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

3-1 Preparation Procedure

1. Installation
Install the Inverter according to installation conditions. Refer to page 2-7.
S Check that all the installation conditions are met.
2. Wiring
Connect the power supply and peripheral devices. Refer to page 2-10.
S Select peripheral devices that meet the specifications, and wire them correctly.
3. Turning the Power ON
Check the necessary items, then turn the power ON.
S Check that the power voltage is correct and the power input terminals (L1 (R), L2 (S), and L3 (T))
are wired correctly. Supply three-phase, 200 to 230 VAC (50/60 Hz) to the 200-V Inverter and
three-phase 380 to 460 VAC (50/60 Hz) to the 400-V Inverter.
S Check that the motor output terminals (T1 (U), T2 (V), and T3 (W)) and motor are connected cor-
rectly.
S Check that the control circuit terminals and controller are connected correctly.
4. Checking the Display Status
Check the Inverter for errors.
S If everything is normal, the data display will show the data selected with a monitor item indicator.
S If the Inverter is error, the data display will show data indicating that the Inverter is error. Refer to
Section 4 Operation for details.
5. Setting the Parameters
Use the Digital Operator to set parameters required for operation. Refer to page 3-4.
S Set each parameter as described in this manual.
6. Test RUN
Use the Digital Operator to rotate the motor. Refer to page 3-10.
S Check that the motor is rotating normally.
7. Operation
Basic operation (The Inverter operates with basic settings). Refer to page 3-13.
Applied operation (The Inverter performs energy-saving control, PID control, or other applied con-
trol). Refer to page 3-25.
S Refer to 3-4 Basic Operation for operation with basic parameters only.
S Refer to 3-4 Basic Operation and 3-5 Applied Operation for energy-saving control, PID control,
frequency jumping, error retrying, or S-shaped acceleration and deceleration.
S Refer to 3-5 Applied Operation for parameters in detail.

3-3
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

3-2 Using the Digital Operator

3-2-1 Nomenclature
Operation Mode Indicators
External Operation:
REMOTE Lit when operating references from exter-
SEQ REF
nal terminals are in effect.
Analog Input:
Lit when high-frequency references from
external analog terminals are in effect.

Data Display
Displays frequency reference, out-
put frequency, output current,
Fref Fout Iout kWout constant set values, Inverter status,
etc.
F/R Montr Accel Decel
Easy-setting indicators
Displays basic parameter Vmtr V/F Fgain Fbias
Enter Key
constants and monitor items. FLA PID kWsav PRGM
Enters set value when pressed after
(See note 1.) constant has been set.

DIGITAL OPERATOR PJVOP131E


Increment Key
Mode Key Increments numbers when pressed
Switches basic parameter during setting of constant number
constant and monitor items. and constant data.
Decrement Key
Operation Mode Selection Key Decrements numbers when
LOCAL pressed during setting of constant
Switches between operation by the
Digital Operator and operation REMOTE number and constant data.
specified in the operation mode
selection parameter (n002). STOP Stop/Reset Key
RUN Stops the Inverter. Also resets after
RESET
alarm has been generated. (See note 2.)

Run Key
Starts the Inverter.

Note 1. The Inverter does not start while any indicator on the bottom two lines is lit. To start the Invert-
er, press the Mode Key to light up an indicator on the top two lines and press the RUN Key.
Note 2. For safety reasons, the reset function cannot be used while the run command (forward/re-
verse) is being input. Turn the run command OFF before using the reset function.

3-4
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

3-2-2 Summary

H Data Display
Press the Mode Key to select the item displayed on the data display.
The items on the first two lines of the monitor item indicators can be set or monitored
while the Inverter is running.
All the items of the monitor item indicators can be set or monitored while the Inverter is
not running.

Power supply ON

Fref Fout Iout kWout

Speed setting/Monitor Output frequency Output current monitor Output power monitor
monitor

F/R Montr Accel Decel


Operator forward/ Monitor selection Acceleration time Deceleration time
reverse selection setting setting

Vmtr V/F Fgain Fbias


Motor rated V/f pattern selection Frequency reference Frequency reference
voltage setting gain bias

FLA PID kWsav PRGM


Motor rated PID control selection Energy-saving control Constant setting mode
current setting selection

Note The following items can be set or monitored with the monitor item indicators.

3-5
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Indicator Item Function


Fref Speed setting/Monitor The frequency reference can be set or monitored. The unit to
be used can be set with n024.
Fout Output frequency The output frequency can be monitored. The setting unit can
monitor be set with n024.
Iout Output current The output current can be monitored in 0.1-A units.
monitor
kWout Output power monitor The output power can be monitored in 0.1-kW units.
F/R Operator The forward or reverse rotation of the motor can be set or
forward/reverse checked. This item can be set with the Digital Operator only.
selection
Montr Monitor selection Thirteen items can be monitored.
Accel Acceleration time Acceleration time 1 can be set or checked with n019 in 1-s
setting units if acceleration time 1 is set to 1,000 or a larger value and
0.1-s units if acceleration time 1 is set to a value less than
1,000.
Decel Deceleration time Deceleration time 1 can be set or checked with n020 in 1-s
setting units if the deceleration time is set to 1,000 or a larger value
and 0.1-s units if the deceleration time is set to a value less
than 1,000.
Vmtr Motor rated voltage The rated input voltage of the motor can be set with n011 while
setting the Inverter is not running.
V/F V/f pattern selection The V/f pattern can be set with n010 while the Inverter is not
running.
Fgain Frequency reference The frequency reference gain can be set with n046 while the
gain Inverter is not running.
Fbias Frequency reference The frequency reference bias can be set with n047 while the
bias Inverter is not running.
FLA Motor rated current The rated input current of the motor can be set with n032 while
setting the Inverter is not running.
PID PID control selection The PID control function can be selected with n084 while the
Inverter is not running.
kWsav Energy-saving control The energy-saving control function can be selected with n095
selection while the Inverter is not running.
PRGM Constant setting All parameters can be set or checked.
mode

3-6
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

H Parameters
Parameters can be set with the monitor item indicators or by designating the corre-
sponding parameter numbers. Basic parameters can be set with the monitor item indica-
tors. Parameter settings with the monitor item indicators are different in method from
parameter settings by designating the corresponding parameter constants.

D Setting Parameter Constants with the Indicators


Example: Changing Acceleration Time From 10 s to 50 s

Accel Accel Accel

Acceleration Data flashes Acceleration


time: 10 s Change Enter time: 50 s To another
during change
data data setting

D Setting Parameter Constants by Specifying Parameter Constant Number


Example: Setting Constant No. 025 (Frequency Reference 1)

PRGM PRGM PRGM

Display Display constant no. 25 Return to constant


constant Change number display To another
constant constant
number setting

PRGM PRGM PRGM PRGM

Display contents of Data flashes Displayed for


constant no. 25 Change during change Enter approx. 1 s
data data

Note There are some parameters that cannot be changed while the Inverter is running. To change
these parameter, stop the Inverter first.

H Checking Monitor Contents


Example: Checking Output Voltage (Monitor Item No. U-04)

Montr Montr Montr

Display Display U-04 Monitor


Change Check To another
monitor output
monitor monitor monitor
voltage
item contents

3-7
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
D Monitor Display Table
Monitor No. Monitor item Description
U-01 Frequency The frequency reference can be monitored. The display unit can be set
reference with n024. The frequency reference can be monitored with the FREF
indicator as well.
U-02 Output frequency The output frequency can be monitored. The display unit can be set
with n024. The output frequency can be monitored with the
FREQUENCY indicator as well.
U-03 Output current The output current can be monitored in 0.1-A units. The output current
can be monitored with 0.1-A units with the IOUT indicator as well.
U-04 Output voltage The output voltage can be monitored in 1-V units.
U-05 DC voltage The DC voltage can be monitored in 1-V units.
U-06 Output power The output power can be monitored in 0.1-kW units. The output power
can be monitored in 0.1-kW units with the POWER indicator as well.
U-07 Input terminal The statuses of input terminals S1 to S6 can be monitored.
status

Lit when S1 is ON.


Lit when S2 is ON.
Lit when S3 is ON.
Lit when S4 is ON.
Lit when S5 is ON.
Lit when S6 is ON.
Not used (Not lit).
U-08 Inverter status The status of the Inverter can be monitored.

Lit while the Inverter is running.


Lit when the reverse rotation command is given.
Lit when the Inverter is ready to operate.
Lit when the Inverter is error.
Not used (Not lit).
Lit when MA, MB, and MC outputs are ON.
Lit when outputs M1 and M2 are ON.
U-09 Error before The four most-recent errors before the power supplied to the Inverter is
power interruption turned OFF can be checked.
U-10 PROM number For the manufacturer’s use.
U-11 Total operating The accumulated operating time can be monitored with 1-h units. The
time (rightmost 4 maximum value is 279,620 h.
digits) Accumulated operating time (h) = U-12 value x 10,000 + U-11 value
U-12 Total operating
time (leftmost 2
digits)
U-13 PID feedback The PID feedback can be monitored in 0.1-Hz units.
value

H Operation Mode Selection Key/Operation Mode Selection Input


The operation mode of the Inverter can be changed using the Operation Mode Selection Key on the
Digital Operator. Using this key, it is possible to switch between the two operation modes shown below.

3-8
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
The same kind of switching is also possible with control circuit terminals set using the multi-function
input parameters 1 to 5 (set value: 5).
Operation mode Description Contents
Remote Inverter operates according to control Run commands and frequency
signals from a higher level control references determined by the setting of
system. the operation mode selection parameter
(n002).
Local Inverter operates alone in order to check Run commands: RUN and STOP/RESET
operation directly related to the Inverter. Keys.
Frequency reference: Value set with the
Digital Operator.
Note Performs operation for a operation
mode selection parameter value
(n002) of 0.

Note 1. The operation mode will always be Remote mode when power is supplied. Therefore, to start
operation immediately after power is supplied, set n002 to the required settings in advance.
Note 2. If n002 is set to 0, there is no difference in the two modes.
Note 3. Frequencies set from the Digital Operator using the speed setting will be entered in frequency
reference parameters 1 to 4 (n025 to n028) or the inching frequency reference parameter
(n029) regardless of whether the mode is Remote mode or Local mode.
Note 4. Multi-function inputs 1 to 5 will be enabled regardless of whether the mode is Remote mode or
Local mode. The following settings, however, will be disabled in Local mode.
S Reverse rotation/stop (2-wire sequence selection); Set value: 0
S Stop command (3-wire sequence selection); Set value: 1
Note 5. For safety reasons, run signals input while changing from Local mode to Remote mode are
usually ignored. Input the run signal again after the mode has changed. It is possible, how-
ever, to stop such run signals being ignored by setting the Operation Selection at Operation
Mode switching (Local/Remote switching) parameter (n114) to 1. If this setting is made, when
the mode changes from Local mode to Remote mode, the Inverter will start running immedi-
ately. Take steps to ensure the safety of the system for such operation.

3-9
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

3-3 Test Run

After wiring is complete, perform a test run of the Inverter. First, start the motor through
the Digital Operator without connecting the motor to the mechanical system. Next, con-
nect the motor to the mechanical system and perform a test run. Finally, operate the con-
troller to make sure that the sequence of operations is correct. Refer to the following to
perform a test run of the Inverter.

1. Wiring
S Check that power is connected to power input terminals L1 (R), L2 (S), and L3 (T).
Supply three-phase, 200 to 230 VAC (50/60 Hz) to the 200-V Inverter and three-phase 380 to 460
VAC (50/50 Hz) to the 400-V Inverter.
S Check that terminals T1 (U), T2 (V), and T3 (W) are correctly connected to the motor power cables.
S Do not load the motor with a mechanical system. Check that the motor has no load.
S Check that the forward/stop and reverse/stop inputs are OFF before connecting signal lines to the
control circuit terminals.
2. Turning Power ON and Checking Indicator Display
S Supply power to the Inverter.
S Check that the data display is not showing any error.
3. Parameter Initialization
S Set n001 to 6 to initialize all parameters.
Key Indicator Data example Explanation
Mode Key PRGM n001 Press the Mode Key until the PRGM indicator is lit.
Enter Key PRGM 1 Check that “n001” is displayed and press the Enter
Key so that the data of n001 will be displayed.
If “n001” is not displayed, press the Increment Key or
Decrement Key so that “n001” will be displayed.
Then press the Enter Key.
Up/Down Key PRGM 6 Press the Increment Key or Decrement Key so that
(Flashing) “6” will be displayed, in which case the data display
will flash.
Enter Key PRGM end Press the Enter Key.
“End” will appear for approximately 1 s.
PRGM 1 After “End” appears, n001 will be initialized and “1”
will be displayed.
Mode Key PRGM n001 Press the Mode Key so that “n001” will be displayed.

4. Rated Input Voltage of Motor


S Set the rated input voltage of the motor with the Digital Operator.
S The 200-V Inverter is set to 200.0 V and the 400-V Inverter is set to 400.0 V as rated input voltages
of motors before shipping.

3-10
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
S Check the rated input voltage of the motor and set the rated input voltage of the motor.
Example: Motor with Rated Input Voltage of 180 V
Key Indicator Data example Explanation
Mode Key Vmtr 200.0 Press the Mode Key until the MOTOR VOLTAGE
indicator is lit.
Down Key Vmtr 180.0 Press the Increment Key so that “180.0” will be
(Flashing) displayed, in which case the data display will flash.
Enter Key Vmtr 180.0 Press the Enter Key.
5. Rated Input Current of Motor
S Set the rated input current of the motor with the Digital Operator.
S The default-set value varies with the Inverter model.
S Check the rated input current of the motor and set the rated input current.
Example: Motor with Rated Input Current of 8.5 A
Key Indicator Data example Explanation
Mode Key FLA 14.1 Press the Mode Key until the MOTOR CURRENT
indicator is lit.
Down Key FLA 8.5 Press the Increment Key so that “8.5” will be
(Flashing) displayed, in which case the data display will flash.
Enter Key FLA 8.5 Press the Enter Key.
6. Frequency Reference
S Set the frequency according to the rotation speed of the motor.
S Press the Mode Key until the FREF indicator is lit, press the Increment Key or Decrement Key to
set the frequency, and press the Enter Key.
7. Operation With No Load
S Press the Operation Mode Selection Key.
S Check that the operation mode indicators (i.e., the remote RUN indicator and analog input indica-
tor) are not lit.
S Press the RUN Key to start the motor.
S To change the rotation direction of the motor, press the Mode Key until the F/R indicator is lit, press
the Increment Key or Decrement Key to set the rotation direction, and press the Enter Key.
Indicator Data example Explanation
F/R f%r Forward rotation command
reU Reverse rotation command
S Check that the motor is rotating without error vibration or noise after the frequency reference or
rotation direction is changed.
S To stop the motor, press the STOP/RESET Key.
8. Mechanical System
S Load the motor with the mechanical system after making sure that the motor rotates normally.
S Before loading the motor with the mechanical system, check that the output of the Inverter is inter-
rupted and the motor stops by pressing the STOP/RESET Key.
9. V/f Pattern
S Set the V/f pattern according to the characteristics of the mechanical system.

3-11
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
S Press the Mode Key until the V/F indicator is lit.
S The following two methods are available to set the V/f pattern.
S Select one of the fixed 15 V/f patterns preset with the Inverter, in which case set the V/f pattern
to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, b, C, d, or E.
S Set the V/f pattern to F for an optional V/f pattern.
S The following are the fixed V/f patterns preset with the Inverter. Refer to 3-4 Basic Operation for
details.
Characteristic Use Set Specification
value
General These V/f patterns are mainly used for 0 50 Hz
purpose general purposes, such as the control 1 60 Hz
of straight conveyor lines. Apply these
V/f patterns to the motor if the rotation 2 60 Hz. Voltage saturation at
speed of the motor must change in 50 Hz.
almost direct proportion to the load 3 72 Hz. Voltage saturation at
factor of the motor. 60 Hz.
Reduced These V/f patterns are mainly used for 4 50 Hz with cube reduction.
torque fan pumps. Apply these V/f patterns to
the motor if the rotation speed of the 5 50 Hz with square reduction.
motor must change in square or cube 6 60 Hz with cube reduction.
proportion to the load factor of the
motor. 7 60 Hz with square reduction.
High starting These V/f patterns are usually 8 50 Hz with low starting torque.
torque unnecessary because the Inverter has 9 50 Hz with high starting torque.
a full automatic torque boost function to
supply enough power to meet the A 60 Hz with low starting torque.
starting torque of the motor. B 60 Hz with high starting torque.
Constant power These V/f patterns are used to rotate C 90 Hz. Voltage saturation at
operation the motor with an output at 60 Hz or 60 Hz.
more. Apply these V/f patterns to the D 120 Hz. Voltage saturation at
motor to impose a constant voltage at 60 Hz.
60 Hz min. on the motor.
E 180 Hz. Voltage saturation at
60 Hz.

S Select a V/f pattern suited to the mechanical system from the above V/f patterns.
S Set the V/f pattern to F for an optional V/f pattern to be determined with n012 to n018. The optional
V/f pattern set with the Inverter before shipping is the same as the V/f pattern obtained with the set
value 1.
10. Operation with Actual Load
S Be ready to press the STOP/RESET Key for any error operation of the Inverter or the load.
S Use the Digital Operator to operate the Inverter in the same way as the operation of the Inverter
with no load.
S Set the frequency reference so that the motor will rotate at an approximately 10% of the rotation
speed of the motor in actual operation.
S Set the frequency reference according to the actual rotation speed of the motor after making sure
that the mechanical system operates correctly and smoothly.
S Change the frequency reference and the rotation direction of the motor and check that the me-
chanical system operates without error vibration or noise.

3-12
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

3-4 Basic Operation


Refer to the following for the basic settings required to start and stop operating the In-
verter. Only these settings are required for the Inverter in basic operation. These set-
tings as well as other settings are required by the Inverter for any applied operation, such
as energy-saving control or PID control.

H Parameter Write Prohibit Selection (n001)


S The parameters used by the Inverter are classified into the following three groups.
Group 1: n001 to n034
Group 2: n035 to n049
Group 3: n050 to n108 (Up to n102 can be used.)
S The Inverter is default-set so that only parameters of group 1 can be set and checked and the pa-
rameters of groups 2 and 3 can only be checked.
S The Inverter in basic operation uses the parameters of groups 1 and 2. Therefore, set n001 to 2 or
3 so that these parameters can be checked and set.

n001 Parameter Write Prohibit Selection/Parameter Initialization


Setting range 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, and Unit --- Default setting 1
7
Set Values
Set value Description
0 The parameters n001 can be set and checked and the parameters n002 to n108 can be only
checked.
1 The parameters of group 1 (i.e., n001 to n034) can be set and checked and the parameters of
groups 2 and 3 (i.e., n035 to n049 and n050 to n108) can be only checked.
2 The parameters of groups 1 and 2 can be set and checked and the parameters of group 3 can
only be checked.
3 The parameters of groups 1, 2, and 3 can be set and checked.
6 All parameters will be set to default-set values.
7 All parameters will be initialized with a three-wire sequence.
Note Do not set n001 to any value other than the above.

H Operation Mode Selection (n002)


S The Inverter has four operation modes. Select one of the modes with n002.

n002 Operation Mode Selection


Setting range 0 to 3 Unit --- Default setting 3
Set Values
Set value Run command Frequency reference
0 Digital Operator (RUN/STOP Key) Digital Operator (Frequency reference 1)
1 Control circuit terminals Digital Operator (Frequency reference 1)
(Forward/reverse/stop input)
2 Digital Operator (RUN/STOP Key) Control circuit terminals (Analog input)
3 Control circuit terminals Control circuit terminals (Analog input)
(Forward/reverse/stop input)

3-13
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Note 1. Do not set n002 to any value other than the above.
Note 2. The frequency reference input according to the operation mode selection setting will be used
as frequency reference 1 in multi-step speed operation. If the frequency reference is deter-
mined by control circuit terminals, the frequency reference input using the control circuit ter-
minals’ analog input will be enabled and the frequency reference 1 parameter setting (n025)
will be ignored. (If, however, the mode is changed to Local mode using the Digital Operator,
then the value set in n025 will be enabled.)
Note 3. Frequency references 2 to 4 (n026 to n028) and the inching frequency reference (n029) used
in multi-step speed operation will be determined by the parameter settings, regardless of the
operation mode selection setting.

H Frequency Reference Type Selection (n042, n046, and n047) through


Control Circuit Terminal
S Select the FV terminal to input the frequency reference within a voltage range from 0 to 10 VDC or
the FI terminal to input the frequency reference within a current range from 4 to 20 mA with n042.

n042 Analog Frequency Reference Voltage/Current Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0

Set Values
Set value Description
0 The FV terminal can be used for the analog frequency reference within a voltage range from 0
to 10 VDC.
1 The FI terminal can be used for the analog frequency reference. Set the input level with n043.

Note 1. The FI terminal is a current input terminal for 4 to 20 mA. The FI terminal can be a voltage input
terminal by changing the FI input level with n043 and cutting jumper wire of the PCB. Do not,
however, change the FI terminal to a voltage input terminal unless the Inverter is used for PID
control.
Note 2. Set n042 according to the type of frequency reference.
S Set the frequency reference gain with n046 and the frequency reference bias with n047.

n046 Frequency Reference Gain


Setting range 0 to 200 Unit % Default setting 100

n047 Frequency Reference Bias


Setting range –100 to 100 Unit % Default setting 0

Set Values
S n046: The frequency for 10-V or 20-mA input can be set in 1% units based on the maximum fre-
quency set with n012 as 100%.

3-14
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
S n047: The frequency for 0-V or 4-mA input can be set in 1% units based on the maximum fre-
quency set with n012 as 100%.
Frequency reference
Maximum frequency x
frequency reference
gain/100

Maximum frequency x
frequency reference
bias/100
Items in parentheses apply
0V 10 V when the frequency reference
(4 mA) (20 mA) is input with current.

Note The frequency reference gain and frequency reference bias can be set with the GAIN indicator
and BIAS indicator.

H Frequency Reference Selection (n024 to n029) through Digital


Operator
S Frequency references can be input through the Digital Operator by setting the unit of the frequency
references with n024 and the values of the frequency references with n025 to n028. The inching
frequency reference must be set with n029 if an inching frequency is required.

n024 Unit of Frequency Reference


Setting range 0 to 3,999 Unit --- Default setting 0
Set Values
Set value Description
0 0.1-Hz units
1 0.1% units based on the maximum frequency as 100%.
2 to 39 r/min (r/min = 120 x frequency/n024
Set n024 to the number of poles of the motor.
40 to Determine the display method of the maximum frequency set with n012. A frequency less
3,999 than the maximum frequency will be displayed proportionally.
Example: Set n024 to 1100 so that “10.0” will be displayed at the maximum frequency.
10.0 →1100
Value with no decimal point.
Decimal point position
S Set frequency references 1 to 4 with n025 to n028. The multi-step speed command must be se-
lected to use frequency references 2 to 4. Refer to page 3-17, Multi-function Input Selection (n035
to n039) for details.

n025 Frequency Reference 1


Setting range 0 to maximum Unit Set with n024 Default setting 6.0
frequency

n026 Frequency Reference 2


Setting range 0 to maximum Unit Set with n024 Default setting 0.0
frequency

3-15
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

n027 Frequency Reference 3


Setting range 0 to maximum Unit Set with n024 Default setting 0.0
frequency

n028 Frequency Reference 4


Setting range 0 to maximum Unit Set with n024 Default setting 0.0
frequency
S The inching frequency reference must be set with n029 if an inching frequency is required. The
inching command must be selected to use the inching frequency reference. Refer to page 3-17,
Multi-function Input Selection (n035 to n039) for details.

n029 Inching Frequency Reference


Setting range 0 to maximum Unit Set with n024 Default setting 6.0
frequency

H Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selection (n019 to n022)


S Acceleration time and deceleration time can be set with n019 to n022.
S The acceleration/deceleration time switching command must be selected to use acceleration time
2 and deceleration time 2. Refer to page 3-17, Multi-function Input Selection (n035 to n039) for
details.

n019 Acceleration Time 1


Setting range 0.0 to 3,600 Unit s Default setting 10.0

n020 Deceleration Time 1


Setting range 0.0 to 3,600 Unit s Default setting 10.0

n021 Acceleration Time 2


Setting range 0.0 to 3,600 Unit s Default setting 10.0

n022 Deceleration Time 2


Setting range 0.0 to 3,600 Unit s Default setting 10.0

Set Values
S Acceleration time: The time required for the output frequency to be 100% from 0% of the maxi-
mum frequency.
S Deceleration time: The time required for the output frequency to be 0% from 100% of the maxi-
mum frequency.
S Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 is available if the acceleration/deceleration time
switching command is set.

H Motor Rotation Direction Selection (n005 and n006)


S Set the rotation direction of the motor with n005 so that the motor will rotate in the set direction
when the forward rotation command is input.

3-16
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
S Set the rotation direction of the motor with n006 so that the motor will rotate in the set direction
when the reverse rotation command is input or set n006 so that the reverse rotation command will
be ignored.

n005 Forward/Reverse Rotation Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0

Set Values
Set value Description
0 The motor seen from the load side rotates counterclockwise.
1 The motor seen from the load side rotates clockwise.

Note The forward/reverse rotation selection setting (n005) is not initialized when the parameter initial-
ization is performed by setting the parameter write prohibit selection/parameter initialization
parameter (n001) to 6 or 7. To change this setting, change the value of the parameter directly.

n006 Reverse Rotation-inhibit Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0

Set Values
Set value Description
0 The motor can rotate reversely.
1 The motor cannot rotate reversely.

H Multi-function Input Selection (n035 to n039)


S Set n035 to n039 so that the Inverter can use multi-function input terminals 2 to 6 to perform the
following.
Three-wire sequential operation
Multi-step operation
Inching operation
Operation using acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2
S Refer to 3-5-3 List of Parameters for details.

n035 Multi-function Input 1 (S2)


Setting range 0 to 24 Unit --- Default setting 0

n036 Multi-function Input 2 (S3)


Setting range 2 to 24 Unit --- Default setting 2

n037 Multi-function Input 3 (S4)


Setting range 2 to 24 Unit --- Default setting 4

n038 Multi-function Input 4 (S5)


Setting range 2 to 24 Unit --- Default setting 9

3-17
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

n039 Multi-function Input 5 (S6)


Setting range 2 to 25 Unit --- Default setting 10
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Reverse rotation/Stop (2-wire sequence)
1 Stop command (3-wire sequence). S3 will be used for the forward/reverse rotation command
and the value set with n036 will be ignored.
9 Multi-step speed command 1
10 Multi-step speed command 2
11 Inching command
12 Acceleration/Deceleration time switching command

D Example of Wiring for 2-wire Sequential Operation (Set Value: 0)

Forward rotation/Stop

Reverse rotation/Stop

D Example of Wiring for 3-wire Sequential Operation (Set Value: 1)


Stop switch Operation switch
(NC) (NO)
Run command (Operates when the
operation switch is closed)
Stop command (Stops when the stop
switch is open)
Forward/Reverse rotation command

D Example of Multi-step Operation (Set Values: 9 and 10)


Select multi-step speed command 1 for the Inverter in two-step speed operation and multi-step speed
commands 1 and 2 for the Inverter in four-step speed operation.
Frequency
reference Frequency
reference 4
Frequency
reference 3
Frequency
reference 2
Frequency
reference 1

Forward
rotation/Stop

Multi-step speed
command 1
Multi-step speed
command 2

3-18
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
D Example of Inching Operation (Set Value: 11)
Frequency
reference
Frequency
reference 1
Inching operation Inching operation
reference reference

Forward
rotation/Stop
Inching
command

D Example of Acceleration/Deceleration Time Switching (Set Value 12)


Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration Deceleration
Frequency time 1 time 1 time 2 time 2
reference

Maximum
frequency
(n012)

Forward
rotation/Stop

Acceleration/
Deceleration
time switching

Note The acceleration time and deceleration time of the Inverter will be switched the moment the accel-
eration/deceleration time switching command is input while the Inverter is accelerating or decel-
erating the motor.

H V/f Pattern Selection (n010 to n018)


S Set the V/f pattern according to the characteristics of the mechanical system.
S Set the rated input voltage of the motor with n011 according to the rated input voltage of the motor
before setting the V/f pattern. This set value will be used to calculate the voltage axis of the V/f
pattern.

n011 Motor Rated Voltage


Setting range 150.0 to 255.0 Unit V Default setting 200.0 (400.0)
(510.0)

Note The figures in the parentheses apply to the 400-V Inverter.


S Set the V/f pattern.

n010 V/f Pattern Selection


Setting range 0 to F Unit --- Default setting 1

Set Values
S The following two methods are available to set the V/f pattern.

3-19
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
S Select one of the 15 V/f patterns preset with the Inverter, in which case set n010 to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
6, 7, 8, 9, A, b, C, d, or E.
S Set n010 to F for an optional V/f pattern.
S The following are the V/f patterns preset with the Inverter.
Characteristic Use Set Specification
value
General These V/f patterns are mainly used for 0 50 Hz
purpose general purposes, such as the control of
straight conveyor lines. Apply these V/f 1 60 Hz
patterns to the motor if the rotation speed 2 60 Hz. Voltage saturation at 50 Hz.
of the motor must change in almost direct
proportion to the load factor of the motor. 3 72 Hz. Voltage saturation at 60 Hz.
Reduced These V/f patterns are mainly used for fan 4 50 Hz with cube reduction.
torque pumps. Apply these V/f patterns to the 5 50 Hz with square reduction.
motor if the rotation speed of the motor
must change in square or cube proportion 6 60 Hz with cube reduction.
to the load factor of the motor. 7 60 Hz with square reduction.
High starting These V/f patterns are usually 8 50 Hz with low starting torque.
torque unnecessary because the Inverter has a 9 50 Hz with high starting torque.
full automatic torque boost function to
supply enough power to meet the starting A 60 Hz with low starting torque.
torque of the motor. B 60 Hz with high starting torque.
Constant These V/f patterns are used to rotate the C 90 Hz. Voltage saturation at 60 Hz.
power motor with output at 60 Hz or more. Apply
operation these V/f patterns to the motor to impose a D 120 Hz. Voltage saturation at 60 Hz.
constant voltage at 60 Hz minimum on the
E 180 Hz. Voltage saturation at 60 Hz.
motor.

Note 1. Set n010 so that the Inverter will produce high starting torque only in the following cases.
S The wiring distance between the Inverter and the motor is approximately 150 m or more.
S The motor requires high starting torque. The motor requires high starting torque if the motor
is connected a vertical-axis load.
S Power is input to or output from the Inverter through an AC or DC reactor.
Note 2. The set values of n012 to n018 will change automatically if any of the patterns listed in the
above table is selected.
Note 3. Refer to the following graphs for the characteristics of the V/f patterns.
The maximum voltage shown in each of the graphs is 200 V. The actual voltage, however,
corresponds to the set value of n011 (i.e., the rated input voltage of the motor). All voltage
values will change in proportion to the set value of n011. For example, the default-set value of
n011 of the 400-V Inverter is 400 (V). Therefore, double all the voltage values when using the
400-V Inverter.

3-20
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Characteristics of V/f Patterns
D General Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)

Set value 0 Set value 1 Set value 2 Set value 3

(12) (12) (12) (12)


(6) (6) (6) (6)

D Reduced Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)


Set value 4 Set value 5 Set value 6 Set value 7

(6) (6)
(5) (5)

D High Starting Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 8 to b)


Set value 8 Set value 9 Set value A Set value b

(20) (20)
(15) (15)
(9) (11)
(7) (7)

D Constant Power Operation Characteristics (Set Value: C to E)


Set value C Set value d Set value E

(12) (12) (12)


(6) (6) (6)

Note Figures in parentheses apply to 55-kW or higher Inverters.

3-21
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
S An optional V/f pattern is available and n012 to n018 can be set if the V/f pattern is set to F.

n012 Maximum Frequency (FMAX)


Setting range 50.0 to 400.0 Unit Hz Default setting 60.0

n013 Maximum Voltage (VMAX)


Setting range 0.1 to 255.0 Unit V Default setting 200.0 (400.0)
(510.0)

n014 Maximum Voltage Frequency (FA)


Setting range 0.2 to 400.0 Unit Hz Default setting 60.0

n015 Intermediate Output Frequency (FB)


Setting range 0.1 to 399.9 Unit Hz Default setting 3.0

n016 Intermediate Output Frequency Voltage (VC)


Setting range 0.1 to 255.0 Unit V Default setting 15.0 (30.0)
(510.0) (See note 2.)

n017 Minimum Output Frequency (FMIN)


Setting range 0.1 to 10.0 Unit Hz Default setting 1.5

n018 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage (VMIN)


Setting range 0.1 to 50.0 Unit V Default setting 10.0 (20.0)
(100.0) (See note 2.)

Note 1. Figures in parentheses apply to the 400-V Inverter.


Note 2. The default settings for 55-kW or higher Inverters are as follows:
200-V 55-kW or higher Inverters: n016 = 12.0 V, n018 = 6.0 V
400-V 55-kW or higher Inverters: n016 = 24.0 V, n018 = 12.0 V
Optional V/f Pattern in Detail
Voltage

Frequency
(Hz)

3-22
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Note The V/f pattern is a straight line if there is no difference between n015 and n017 in set value, in
which case the set value of n016 will be ignored.

H Interruption Mode and Protective Function Selection (n003, n004,


n008, n032, and n033)
S Set the input voltage of the Inverter to determine the voltage protective level of the Inverter.

n003 Input Voltage Selection


Setting range 150.0 to 255.0 Unit V Default setting 200.0 (400.0)
(510.0)
S Set the stop mode of the Inverter with n004.

n004 Interruption Mode Selection


Setting range 0 to 3 Unit --- Default setting 0
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Deceleration stop (See notes 1 and 2.)
1 Free running stop (See note 3.)
2 Free running stop 1 with timer. The run command during acceleration time 1 or 2 will be ignored.
3 Free running stop 2 with timer. The constant run command is valid. The motor will start running
after deceleration time 1 or 2 passes.
Note 1. If multi-function inputs 1 to 5 (n035 to n039) are not set to acceleration/deceleration time
switching command (set value: 12), the motor will decelerate to a stop according to the setting
of deceleration time 1 (n020). If any one of the multi-function inputs is set to acceleration/de-
celeration time switching command, then the motor will decelerate according to the decelera-
tion time selected at the time the stop signal is input.
Note 2. If a run signal is input while the motor is decelerating, deceleration will stop and the motor will
accelerate at the same rate.
Note 3. During free running stop, do not input the run signal if the speed at which the motor is rotating
has not dropped sufficiently. If the run signal is input in this state, the motor will be decelerated
to a low frequency very rapidly, and an overvoltage and overcurrent will be detected.
In this case, use free running stop (1 or 2) with timer, and set deceleration times that will
ensure that the speed of the motor has reduced sufficiently. (In either case, the motor will not
start running before the deceleration time has passed.)
To start running during free running stop, turn ON speed search for one of the multi-function
inputs 1 to 5 (n035 to n039). Speed search will detect when the motor has reached an
appropriate speed to start running.
S Set n008 so that the STOP/RESET Key will function properly.

n008 Stop Key Function Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 1
Set Values
Set value Description
0 The STOP/RESET Key will function only when the Inverter is running with the run command
through the Digital Operator.
1 The STOP/RESET Key will be available anytime.

3-23
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
S Set the rated input current of the motor with n032 and the electronic thermal protective function
with n033 to determine the motor protective characteristics.

n032 Motor Rated Current


Setting range See note 1 Unit --- Default setting 1

Note 1. The set value range is from 10% to 200% of the rated output current.
Note 2. The default-set value varies with the Inverter model.
Note 3. Be sure to set n032 after checking the rated input current of the motor.

n033 Electronic Thermal Protection Function Selection


Setting range 0 to 4 Unit --- Default setting 1

Set Values
Set value Description
0 No protection.
1 For standard motors with standard ratings (with a time constant of 8 min).
2 For standard motors with short-time ratings (with a time constant of 5 min).
3 For dedicated motors with standard ratings (with a time constant of 8 min).
4 For dedicated motors with short-time ratings (with a time constant of 5 min).

3-24
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

3-5 Applied Operation

3-5-1 Energy-saving Mode

The Inverter in energy-saving mode will automatically save unnecessary power supply
to the motor if the load is light and the motor is a standard motor or dedicated motor for
inverters.
The Inverter in energy-saving mode will estimate the load factor of the motor from the
current consumption of the motor and controls the output voltage to supply only neces-
sary power if the load is light. Energy-saving mode is appropriate for loads with little fluc-
tuation. It is not appropriate for control that requires a response time of less than 50 ms.
The longer the energy-saving time of the Inverter is, the more effectively the power sup-
plied to the load is saved. The power supplied to the load will be hardly saved if the load
exceeds 70% of the rated output torque of the motor.
The Inverter in energy-saving mode cannot save unnecessary power supply to special
motors, such as spindle motors and submersible motor.
Refer to the following for the settings of the Inverter enabling it to perform energy-saving
control.

H Energy-saving Control
The following are the energy-saving control steps of the Inverter.

1. The Inverter starts accelerating the motor normally. The Inverter does not perform energy-saving
control while the Inverter is accelerating the motor.
2. The Inverter will perform energy-saving control when the output frequency corresponds to the fre-
quency specified by the frequency reference.
3. The Inverter calculates the ideal output voltage from the running condition of the Inverter and the
energy-saving coefficient K2 set with n096.
4. The output voltage is changed to the ideal output voltage.
5. The Inverter uses the auto-tuning function (search operation) to find the minimum output power that
the Inverter supplies to the motor.
Auto-tuning function (search operation):
Finds the minimum output power that the Inverter supplies to the motor by changing the output volt-
age with the auto-tuning voltage steps set with n101 and n102.
6. The Inverter starts decelerating the motor normally. The Inverter does not perform energy-saving
control while the Inverter is decelerating the motor.

3-25
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
The most efficient input voltage imposed on the motor varies with the load factor of the motor. The In-
verter in energy-saving mode calculates the ideal output voltage and adjusts the ideal output voltage so
that the actual power supplied to the motor can be minimized.
Power
consumption

Load factor: 100%

Load factor: 50%

Motor voltage

H Energy-saving Control Settings

n095 Energy-saving Control Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0

Set Values
Set value Description
0 Inhibits the Inverter from performing energy-saving control.
1 Permits the Inverter to perform energy-saving control.

Note Set n095 to 1 so that the Inverter will perform energy-saving control.

n096 Energy-saving Coefficient K2


Setting range 0.00 to 655.0 Unit --- Default setting See note

Note The default-set value of n096 varies with the Inverter model.

Set Values
S Set the K2 value according to the capacity of the motor.
S The K2 value of each Inverter model is set to the following before shipping according to the maxi-
mum capacity of the motor that can be connected to the Inverter model.

3-26
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

200-V class 400-V class


Capacity of motor (kW) Energy-saving Capacity of motor (kW) Energy-saving
coefficient K2 (n096) coefficient K2 (n096)
0.4 288.2 0.4 576.4
0.75 223.7 0.75 447.4
1.5 169.4 1.5 338.8
2.2 156.8 2.2 313.6
3.7 122.9 3.7 245.8
5.5 94.75 5.5 189.5
7.5 72.69 7.5 145.4
11 70.44 11 140.9
15 63.13 15 126.3
18 57.87 18 115.7
22 51.79 22 103.6
30 46.27 30 92.54
37 38.16 37 76.32
45 35.78 45 71.56
55 31.35 55 67.20
75 23.10 75 46.20
--- --- 110 36.23
160 30.13
185 30.57
220 27.13
300 21.76

Note 1. The above K2 values are for standard motors and dedicated motors for inverters. The Inverter
in energy-saving mode cannot save unnecessary power supply to high-speed motors (e.g.,
spindle motors) or any other motor that has an efficiency curve with more than one peak (e.g.,
any double squirrel-cage motor).
Note 2. The Inverter performs energy-saving control at 15 to 120 Hz. The Inverter does not perform
energy-saving control at a frequency exceeding 120 Hz.

n100 Search Control Voltage Limit


Setting range 0 to 100 Unit % (Rated input Default setting 0
voltage ratio of
motor)

Set Values
S Set the range of the variable voltage of the Inverter in search operation mode with 1% units based
on the rated input voltage of the motor set with n011 as 100%.
S The value of n100 is usually set to a range from 0 to 20%. Usually n100 is set to 10%.
S The search operation will not be available if n100 is set to 0.

n097 Energy-saving Voltage Lower Limit for 60 Hz


Setting range 0 to 120 Unit % (Rated input Default setting 50
voltage ratio of
motor)

3-27
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

n098 Energy-saving Voltage Lower Limit for 6 Hz


Setting range 0 to 25 Unit % (Rated input Default setting 12
voltage ratio of
motor)

Set Values
S Set the lower output voltage limits of the Inverter in energy-saving mode.
S It is usually unnecessary to change the default-set values of n097 and n098.
S The parameters n097 and n098 set the lower output voltage limits of the Inverter to prevent the
motor from stalling.
S Set n097 and n098 to values 5% to 10% larger than the default-set values if the motor stalls.
Output voltage lower limit (%)

n099 Mean Power Time


Setting range 1 to 200 Unit x 25 ms Default setting 1

Set Values
S Set time to calculate the mean output power of the Inverter in energy-saving mode.
S It is usually not necessary to change the default-set value of n099.
S The Inverter calculates its mean output power during the time set with n099 for the energy-saving
control of the motor.
S The time set with n099 is used as a search operation period, in which the output voltage of the
Inverter in search operation mode changes.
S Set n099 to a value larger than the default-set value if the load factor of the motor changes greatly
or the friction factor of the load is large and the motor vibrates.

n101 Search Operation Control Voltage Step when 100%


Setting range 0.1 to 10.0 Unit % (Rated input Default setting 0.5
voltage ratio of
motor)

n102 Search Operation Control Voltage Step when 5%


Setting range 0.1 to 10.0 Unit % (Rated input Default setting 0.2
voltage ratio of
motor)

Set Values
S The values set with n101 and n102 are used as voltage change rates, at which the output voltage
of the Inverter in search operation mode changes.
S It is usually not necessary to change the default-set values of n101 and n102.

3-28
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
S A voltage change rate can be set according to the output voltage of the Inverter.
S Set n101 and n102 to values smaller than the default-set values if it is necessary to minimize the
speed ripples of the motor.
Auto-tuning voltage step (%)

Inverter voltage output

H Effective Energy-saving Control


Take the following steps to check whether the Inverter in energy-saving mode is saving unnecessary
power supply to the motor.

1. Output Power
Press the ENERGY SAVE Key and POWER Key to check whether the output power of the Inverter
in energy-saving mode is lower than that of the Inverter not in energy-saving mode.
2. Motor
Check that the motor does not stall or vibrate error when the Inverter performs energy-saving con-
trol.

H Troubleshooting of Energy-saving Control Problems


If the Inverter in energy-saving mode stalls the motor, vibrates the motor, or does not
save unnecessary power supply to the motor, refer to the following table to check the
probable cause of the trouble and take countermeasures against the trouble.
Running conditions of the motor may inhibit the Inverter from performing effective ener-
gy-saving control.

Problem Probable cause Remarks


Output power does not Inverter is running at a The Inverter does not save unnecessary
change frequency exceeding 120 Hz power supply to the motor while the
Inverter is running at a frequency
exceeding 120 Hz.

3-29
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Problem Probable cause Remarks


Inverter does not perform Load factor of the motor is too The Inverter does not perform effective
effective energy-saving control large energy-saving control if the load factor of
the motor is too large.
Reference: Energy-saving control of motor
with 7.5-kW output

Energy saved (W)

Output frequency: 60 Hz

Load factor (%)


Constantly rotating motor Value of the energy-saving Set K2 with n096 according to the capacity
drops its rotation speed for a coefficient K2 is too small and of the motor.
moment the ideal output voltage Reset K2 to the value for the capacity of a
calculated by the Inverter is motor one rank lower than the motor in
low use if the same trouble occurs after K2 is
set according to the capacity of the motor.
Motor vibrates or does not Mechanical system is Set the mean power time with n099 to a
rotate smoothly when the load resonating with the Inverter larger value.
is light
Motor stalls Output voltage is too small Set the lower output voltage limits with
n097 and n098 to larger values.
Set the energy-saving coefficient K2 with
n096 to a larger value.
Reset K2 to the value for the capacity of a
motor one rank lower than the motor in
use if the same trouble occurs after K2 is
set according to the capacity of the motor.
Motor changes its rotation Speed ripples are generated Set the values of n101 and n102 to smaller
speed periodically in by the search operation values.
synchronization with the mean voltage change rates Set the search operation voltage limit with
power time n100 to 0 so that the search operation
function will not work.
Motor is overloaded only when Search operation function is Set the search operation voltage limit with
the Inverter performs not working and the output n100 to a smaller value.
energy-saving control voltage is high Set the search operation voltage limit with
although the weight of the load n100 to 0 so that the search operation
is the same as or less than the function will not work.
rated output torque of the
motor

3-30
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

3-5-2 PID Control


PID (proportional, integral, and derivative) control is a method to control a mechanical
system by making the feedback values obtained from the mechanical system agree with
the set point that has been preset.
This method makes it possible to control a mechanical system that has dead time.
The Inverter is not suitable for PID control that requires a response time of 50 ms or less.
Refer to the following for examples of PID control that can be performed by the Inverter
as well as the operation of PID control in detail and the settings and adjustments of the
parameters.

H Examples of PID Control


Refer to the following for examples of PID control that can be performed by the Inverter.
Application Control Required sensor
Speed control The Inverter uses the feedback of speed data of the Tachometric generator
mechanical system and makes the operation speed of
the mechanical system agree with the set point.
The Inverter controls the mechanical system in
synchronization with another mechanical system that
inputs its speed data as the set point to the Inverter.
Pressure control The Inverter performs constant pressure control with the Pressure sensor
feedback of pressure data.
Flow control The Inverter performs flow control with the feedback of Flow sensor
flow data.
Temperature control The Inverter performs temperature control using fans with Thermocouple
the feedback of temperature data. Thermistor

H PID Control Operation


The following graph shows control output (output frequency) changes with a constant deviation (i.e., the
difference between the set point and feedback is constant).

Deviation

Time

Control PID control


output
Integral control
Derivative
control

Proportional control

Time

D Proportional Control
Control output in proportion to the deviation is obtained through proportional control. Proportional
control alone cannot make the deviation zero.

3-31
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
D Integral Control
The integrated deviation is obtained as control output from integral control. Integral control makes
the feedback agree with the set point effectively. Integral control, however, cannot keep up with rap-
id feedback changes.

D Derivative Control
The differentiated deviation is obtained as control output from derivative control. Derivative control
can keep up with rapid feedback changes.

D PID Control
PID control makes use of the merits of proportional control, integral control, and derivative control to
perform ideal control.

H Types of PID Control


The Inverter performs two types of PID control (i.e., derivative data PID control and basic PID control).
The Inverter usually performs derivative data PID control.

D Derivative Data PID Control


Derivative data PID control is a type of PID control which differentiates the feedback of values and
keeps up with set point changes and control object changes.

Control
Set point object

Feedback

D Basic PID Control


Basic PID control may cause overshooting or undershooting when the set point changes if the re-
sponse of derivative control is adjusted to keep up with object changes.

Set point Control


object

Feedback

3-32
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

H PID Control Function


Refer to the following block diagram for the PID control performed by the Inverter.

FV terminal

Set point
Proportional Internal limit
gain ±109%
Upper limit
1/Integral time of integral (I)
Multi-function input/PID input selection

Derivative
time

FI terminal PID
PID offset
adjustment primary delay
Feedback ad- time constant
Feedback justment gain

100%: Feedback value Derivative


corresponding to the time
maximum frequency
(N012)

PID control
selection

Inverter fre-
Inside the Inverter quency refer-
ence

H PID Control Settings


n084 PID Control Function Selection
Setting range 0, 1, and 2 Unit --- Default setting 0

Set Values
Set value Description
0 No PID control.
1 PID control with deviation derivative control.
2 PID control with feedback derivative control.
3 PID control with negative feedback characteristic control.
Note 1. Set n084 to 1, 2, or 3 to permit the Inverter to perform PID control.
Note 2. Usually set n084 to 2 to change set points.
Note 3. Set n084 to 3 to perform PID control using the negative characteristic of the characteristic of
the feedback value input from the sensor. Using the negative characteristic means that [100%
– feedback value] is used as the PID feedback value. This is effective for negative characteris-
tic control (control where the feedback value drops when the Inverter’s output frequency
rises).

3-33
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
• If n084 is set to 1 or 2, the method to input the set point will be determined by the operation mode set
with n002 and the FI terminal will be used for feedback input. Set the FI input level with n043 to select
current feedback input or voltage feedback input to the Inverter.

Input terminal Operation mode selection (n002)


0 or 1 (Frequency reference: Digital 2 or 3 (Frequency reference: Control
Operator) circuit terminals)
Set point input Frequency reference: n025 to n029 FV terminal: Voltage frequency reference
input
Feedback input FI terminal: Frequency reference input (default-set to current frequency reference input)

n043 FI Input Level Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 1

Set Values
Set value Description
0 Voltage input within a range from 0 to 10 V. Be sure to cut jumper wire J1.
1 Current input within a range from 4 to 20 mA.

Note Do not impose voltage on the Inverter without cutting jumper wire J1 if n043 is set to 0, otherwise
the input resistor of the Inverter will burn out.

D 200 V, 3.7 kW

Jumper wire

Control
circuit
terminals

Main circuit
terminals
Power input Braking Resistor Motor output

n085 Feedback Adjustment Gain


Setting range 0.00 to 10.00 Unit Times Default setting 1.00

3-34
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Set Values
• Set the feedback adjustment gain with n085.
• The feedback of the FI terminal multiplied by the feedback adjustment gain will be the feedback adjust-
ment gain data of the Inverter.

n086 Proportional Gain (P)


Setting range 0.0 to 10.0 Unit Times Default setting 1.0

n087 Integral Time (I)


Setting range 0.0 to 100.0 Unit s Default setting 10.0

n088 Derivative Time (D)


Setting range 0.00 to 1.00 Unit s Default setting 0.00

Set Values
• The parameters n086, n087, n088 adjust PID control response.
• Set n086, n087, and n088 to optimum values by operating the mechanical system. Refer to page 3-36,
PID Adjustments for details.
• Proportional control or integral control will not be performed if n086 or n087 is set to 0.0 and derivative
control will not be performed if n088 is set to 0.00.

n089 PID Offset Adjustment


Setting range –109 to 109 Unit % (Maximum Default setting 100
frequency ratio)

Set Values
• The parameter n089 adjusts the PID control offset of the Inverter.
• The Inverter adjusts the offset of the voltage used to determine the set point and the offset of analog
input to the FI terminal according to the value set with n089.
• Set n089 so that the output frequency of the Inverter will be 0 Hz when the set point and feedback are
both zero.

n090 Integral Upper Limit


Setting range 0 to 109 Unit % (Maximum Default setting 100
frequency ratio)

Set Values
• The upper limit of integral control quotients is set with n090.
• It is usually unnecessary to change the default-set value of n090.
• Set n090 to a small value if the response of the Inverter may damage the load or allow the motor to go
out of control when the load factor of the motor varies greatly.
• The feedback will not agree with set point if n090 is set to a value that is too small.

n091 PID Primary Delay Constant


Setting range 0.0 to 2.5 Unit s Default setting 0.0

3-35
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Set Values
• The parameter n091 works as a low-pass filter for the PID control output.
• It is usually not necessary to change the default-set value of n091.
• If the friction factor of the mechanical system is large and the mechanical system resonates, set n091
to a value larger than the resonance frequency, in which case, however, the PID response of the In-
verter will be low.

n092 Feedback Loss Detection Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0

Set Values
Set value Description
0 Feedback loss is detected.
1 Feedback loss is not detected.
• By setting n092 to 1, the Inverter determines that the feedback line is disconnected if the Inverter re-
ceives a feedback value that is too low.
• The Inverter will have PID feedback loss output as multi-function output if the Inverter detects feed-
back loss. Therefore, program a sequence to interrupt the operation of the Inverter.

n093 Feedback Loss Detection Level


Setting range 0 to 100 Unit % (Maximum Default setting 0
frequency ratio)

n094 Feedback Loss Detection Time


Setting range 0.0 to 25.5 Unit s Default setting 1.0

Set Values
• Set feedback loss detection conditions with n093 and n094.
• Feedback loss will be detected if the Inverter receives feedback values lower than the feedback loss
detection level set with n093 for the time set with n094.
• Set n093 to a value based on the maximum frequency set with n012 as 100%.

H PID Adjustments

D Step Response
The parameter values used by the Inverter to perform PID control can be adjusted according to the step
response of the control object.

1. Step Response Waveform


Take the following steps to measure the step response waveform of the control object.
a) Connect the load in the same way as the connection of the load to the Inverter in normal opera-
tion.
b) Set n084 to 0 so that the Inverter will not perform PID control.
c) Minimize the acceleration time and input step frequency reference.
d) Measure the response waveform of the feedback.

3-36
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Note Measure the response waveform so that the timing of the step input will be known.
2. Calculation of PID Parameters
S Draw a tangent line contacting with the steepest inclining point of the response waveform.
S Measurement of R
Measure the gradient of the tangent line provided that the set point is 1.
S Measurement of L
Measure the required time (seconds) between the origin and the point of intersection of the tan-
gent line and time axis.
S Measurement of T
Measure the required time (seconds) between the point of intersection of the tangent line and time
axis and the point of intersection of the tangent line and set point line.
S PID Parameters
The following can be calculated from the R, L, and T values as “rules of thumb.”
Control Proportional gain (P) Integral time (I) Derivative time (D)
(n086) (n087) (n088)
Proportional control 0.3/RL --- ---
Proportional/Integral 0.35/RL 1.2T ---
control
PID control 0.6/RL T 0.5L

Note 1. Obtain PID parameter values from the above method, set the PID parameters, and tune in the
PID parameter values exactly.
Note 2. PID parameter values obtained from the above method may not be optimum values if the fric-
tion factor of the mechanical system is large.
Response

Set point

Time

D Manual Adjustments
Take the following steps to adjust the PID parameter values of the Inverter performing PID control by
measuring the response waveform.
1. Set n084 to 2 or 1 so that the Inverter will perform PID control.

3-37
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
2. Increase the proportional gain with n086 within a range causing no vibration.
3. Increase the integral time with n087 within a range causing no vibration.
4. Increase the derivative time with n088 within a range causing no vibration.

H PID Fine Tuning


Refer to the following to tune in PID parameters exactly.

D Suppression of Overshooting
Set the derivative time to a smaller value and the integral time to a larger value if overshooting results.

Response Before fine tuning

After fine tuning

Time

D Prompt Control
Set the integral time to a smaller value and the derivative time to a large value for the prompt control of
overshooting.

Response After fine tuning

Before fine tuning

Time

D Suppression of Long-cycle Vibration


Vibration with a wavelength longer than the integral time results from excessive integral control. The
vibration can be suppressed by setting the integral time to a larger value.

Response Before fine tuning

After fine tuning

Time

3-38
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
D Suppression of Short-cycle Vibration
Vibration with a wavelength almost as long as the derivative time results from excessive derivative con-
trol. The vibration can be suppressed by setting the derivative time to a smaller value. Set the propor-
tional gain to a smaller value or the PID primary delay constant to a larger value if the vibration cannot be
suppressed after the derivative time is set to 0.00.
Response Before fine-tuning

After fine-tuning

Time

3-39
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

3-5-3 List of Parameters


Values in brackets [ ] are default-set values.
Note Parameters that can be changed while the Inverter is running are indicated in bold type.

H Group 1: n001 to n034


Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-
range ence
page
Parameter n001 Parameter 0: The parameters n001 can be set and 0 to 7 3-13
group selection write prohibit checked and the parameters n002 to [1]
selection/Pa- n108 can be only checked.
rameter initial- The speed and direction of the Digital
ization Operator can be set.)
1: The parameters of group 1 (i.e., n001
to n034) can be set and checked and
the parameters of groups 2 and 3 (i.e.,
n035 to n049 and n050 to n108) can be
only checked.
2: The parameters of groups 1 and 2 can
be set and checked and the parame-
ters of group 3 can only be checked.
Parameter ini- 3: The parameters of groups 1, 2, and 3
tialization can be set and checked.
6: All parameters will be set to default-set
values.
7: All parameters will be initialized with a
three-wire sequence.
Note When parameter initialization is per-
formed by setting to 6 or 7, the For-
ward/Reverse rotation selection
(n005) is not initialized. (It is only ini-
tialized when a CPF4 error is
detected.)
Operation n002 Operation Selects method to input run command and 0 to 3 3-13
mode selection mode selection frequency reference. [3]
Run command Frequency reference
0: Digital Operator Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminals Digital Operator
2: Digital Operator Control circuit terminals
3: Control circuit terminals Control circuit terminals
Input voltage n003 Input voltage Set Inverter input voltage in 1-V units. 150.0 3-23
selection selection to
(see note) 255.0
[200.0]
Interruption n004 Interruption 0: Deceleration stop 0 to 3 3-23
mode selection mode selection 1: Free running stop [0]
2: Free running stop 1 with timer. The run
command during deceleration time 1 or
2 will be ignored.
3: Free running stop 2 with timer. The
constant run command is valid. The
motor will start running after decelera-
tion time 1 or 2 passes.
Note With 400-V Inverters, the setting range upper limits and default settings are double those shown
in the table.

3-40
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Motor rotation n005 Forward/Re- 0: When the forward rotation command is 0, 1 [0] 3-17
direction selec- verse rotation input, the motor seen from the load
tion selection side rotates counterclockwise.
1: When the forward rotation command is
input, the motor seen from the load
side rotates clockwise.
Note This parameter is not initialized when
parameter initialization is performed
by setting n001 to 6 or 7. (It is only ini-
tialized when a CPF4 error is
detected.)
n006 Reverse rota- 0: The motor can rotate in reverse. 0, 1 [0] 3-17
tion-inhibit 1: The motor cannot rotate in reverse.
selection

3-41
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Digital Op- n007 Operation 0: Inhibits Operation Mode Selection Key 0, 1 [1] 3-57
erator func- direction from functioning.
tion selec- selection key 1: Permits Operation Mode Selection Key
tion permit/inhibit to function.
n008 Stop Key func- 0: The STOP/RESET Key will function 0, 1 [1] 3-58
tion selection only when the Inverter is running with
the run command through the Digital
Operator.
1: The STOP/RESET Key will function
anytime.
n009 Frequency ref- 0: Permits frequency reference set with 0, 1 [1] 3-58
erence setting the Digital Operator to be valid without
selection Enter Key input.
1: Permits frequency reference set with
the Digital Operator to be valid with En-
ter Key input.
V/f pattern n010 V/f pattern 0to E: Selects from 15 fixed V/f patterns. 0 to F [1] 3-58
selection selection F: Selects optional V/f pattern with n012
to n018 settings.
n011 Rated input Set rated input voltage of motor with 1 V 150.0 to 3-60
voltage of mo- units. 255.0
tor [200.0]
(see note)
V/f pattern n012 Maximum fre- Voltage 50.0 to 3-60
selection (V)
quency 400.0 [60.0]
(FMAX)
n013 Maximum volt- 0.1 to 255.0 3-60
age (VMAX) [200.0] (See
(see note) note 1.)
Frequency
n014 Maximum volt- (Hz) 0.2 to 400.0 3-61
age frequency [60.0]
(FA) The V/f pattern will be a straight line if
n015 Intermediate there is no difference between n015 and 0.1 to 399.9 3-61
output fre- n017 in set value, in which case the set [3.0]
quency (FB) value of n016 will be ignored.
n016 Intermediate 0.1 to 255.0 3-61
output fre- [15.0] (See
quency volt- note 1, 2.)
age (VC)
(see note)
n017 Minimum out- 0.1 to 10.0 3-61
put frequency [1.5]
(FMIN)
n018 Minimum out- 0.1 to 50.0 3-61
put frequency [10.0] (See
voltage note 1, 2.)
(VMIN)
(see note)
Note 1. With 400-V Inverters, the setting range upper limits and default settings are double those
shown in the table.
Note 2. The default settings for Inverters of 55 kW or more are as follows:
n016 = 12.0/24.0, n018 = 6.0/12.0

3-42
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Acceleration/ n019 Acceleration The time required for the output frequency 0.0 to 3-61
Deceleration time 1 to be 100% from 0% of the maximum fre- 3,600
time selection quency. [10.0]
n020 Deceleration The time required for the output frequency 0.0 to 3-61
time 1 to be 0% from 100% of the maximum fre- 3,600
quency. [10.0]
n021 Acceleration Valid if acceleration/deceleration time 0.0 to 3-61
time 2 switching command is selected for multi- 3,600
function input. [10.0]
n022 Deceleration Valid if acceleration/deceleration time 0.0 to 3-62
time 2 switching command is selected for multi- 3,600
function input. [10.0]
S-shaped char- n023 S-shaped char- 0: No s-shaped characteristic time 0 to 3 3-62
acteristic time acteristic time 1: 0.2 s [1]
selection selection 2: 0.5 s
3: 1.0 s
Frequency ref- n024 Unit of frequen- 0: 0.1-Hz units 0 to 3-62
erence selec- cy reference 1: 0.1% units 3,999
tion 2to 39: r/min [0]
(r/min = 120 x frequency/n024
Set n024 to the number of poles of
the motor.)
40 to 3,999: Determine the display meth-
od of the maximum frequency
set with n012.
Example: Set n024 to 1100
so that “10.0” will be dis-
played at the maximum fre-
quency.
Frequency ref- n025 Frequency ref- Set frequency reference using the unit set0 to 3-63
erence selec- erence 1 with n024. maxi-
tion mum
fre-
quency
[6.0]
n026 Frequency ref- Frequency reference with multi-step speed 0 to 3-63
erence 2 command 1 turned ON. maxi-
n027 Frequency ref- Frequency reference with multi-step speed mum 3-63
erence 3 command 2 turned ON. fre-
quency
n028 Frequency ref- Frequency reference with multi-step speed 3-63
[0.0]
erence 4 command 1 and 2 turned ON.
n029 Inching fre- Frequency reference with inching com- 0 to 3-63
quency refer- mand turned ON. maxi-
ence mum
fre-
quency
[6.0]
Output fre- n030 Output frequen- Set output frequency upper limit with 1% 0 to 3-63
quency limit cy upper limit units based on max. frequency set with 109
selection n012 as 100%. [100]
n031 Output frequen- Set output frequency lower limit with 1% 0 to 3-63
cy lower limit units based on max. frequency set with 100 [0]
n012 as 100%.

3-43
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Electronic ther- n032 Motor rated Set rated input current of motor with 1-A See 3-64
mal protection current units as motor basic current for electronic note 1,
function selec- thermal protection. 2
tion n033 Electronic ther- 0: No protection. 0 to 4 3-65
mal protection 1: For standard motors with standard rat- [1]
function selec- ings (with a time constant of 8 min).
tion 2: For standard motors with short-time rat-
ings (with a time constant of 5 min).
3: For Inverter-dedicated motors with
standard ratings (with a time constant
of 8 min).
4: For Inverter-dedicated motors with
short-time ratings (with a time constant
of 5 min).
Overheating n034 Selection of 0: Deceleration stop in deceleration time 1 0 to 3 3-65
stop mode stop method for set with n020 [3]
selection when radiation 1: Free running stop
fin overheats 2: Deceleration stop in deceleration time 2
set with n022
3: Continuous operation with warning
Note 1. Default settings vary with the Inverter model.
Note 2. The motor’s rated current setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter’s rated current.

3-44
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

H Group 2: n035 to n049


Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-
range ence
page
Sequential in- n035 Multi-function 0: Reverse rotation/Stop 0 to 24 3-17
put function input 1 (S2) 1: Stop command (3-wire sequence [0]
selection selection)
S3 will be used for forward/reverse
rotation command and value set with
n036 will be ignored.
2: External error (NO contact: ON)
3: External error (NC contact: ON)
4: Error reset (ON: Valid)
5: Operation mode selection (ON: Digital
Operator; OFF: n002)
6: Not used
7: Emergency stop
8: Analog input selection (ON: Current
input through FI terminal; OFF: FV
terminal)
9: Multi-step speed command 1
10: Multi-step speed command 2
11: Inching command
12: Acceleration/Deceleration time
switching command
13: External baseblock command (ON:
Valid)
14: External baseblock command (OFF:
Valid)
15: Speed search command from max.
frequency
16: Speed search command from set fre-
quency
17: Parameter set-inhibit (ON: Invalid)
18: Integral value of PID control reset
command
19: PID control invalidating command
(Set point used as frequency refer-
ence)
20: Timer function input (Set with n077
and n078)
21: Inverter overheat warning (ON: “OH3”
will be displayed)
22: Analog frequency sample hold
23: Power OFF stop input (NO contact)
24: Power OFF stop input (NC contact)
n036 Multi-function Same as n035 2 to 24 3-17
input 2 (S3) [2]
n037 Multi-function Same as n035 2 to 24 3-17
input 3 (S4) [4]
n038 Multi-function Same as n035 2 to 24 3-17
input 4 (S5) [9]

3-45
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Sequential in- n039 Multi-function 0to 22: Same as n035 2 to 27 3-18
put function input 5 (S6) 25: Up/Down command [10]
selection S5 will be used for the up command,
S6 will be used for the down com-
mand, and value set with n038 will be
ignored.
26: Not used. (Do not set.)
27: PID input characteristic selection
(ON: Deviation multiplied by –1)
Sequential out- n040 Multi-function 0: Error (ON: Error) 0 to 17 3-74
put function contact output 1: Running [0]
selection 1 (MA-MB-MC) 2: Frequency agreement
3: Optional frequency agreement
4: Optional frequency detection (ON:
Output frequency x n073)
5: Optional frequency detection (ON:
Output frequency x n073)
6: Overtorque (ON: Detected)
7: Overtorque (OFF: Detected)
8: Baseblock
9: Operation mode (ON: Digital Opera-
tor/Frequency reference)
10: Inverter ready
11: Timer function output (Set with n077
and n078)
12: Error retrying
13: Inverter/Motor overload warning
14: Frequency reference loss (ON: Fre-
quency reference has dropped by
90% or more within 0.4 s)
15: Not used
16: PID feedback loss (Detecting method
can be set with n093 and n094)
17: Heating heat sink (ON: OH1)
n041 Multi-function Same as n040 0 to 17 3-74
contact output [1]
2 (M1-M2)

3-46
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Frequency ref- n042 Analog fre- 0: The FV terminal can be used for the 0, 1 [0] 3-77
erence function quency refer- analog frequency reference within a
selection ence voltage/ voltage range from 0 to 10 VDC.
current selec- 1: The FI terminal can be used for the
tion analog frequency reference. Set the
input level with n043.
n043 FI input level 0: Voltage input within a range from 0 to 0, 1 [0] 3-78
selection 10 V. Be sure to cut jumper wire J1.
1: Current input within a range from 4 to
20 mA.
n044 Analog fre- 0: Frequency reference on hold is saved 0, 1 [0] 3-78
quency refer- by n025
ence sample 1: Frequency reference on hold is not
hold selection saved.
n045 Processing 0: Inhibits Inverter from processing analog 0, 1 [0] 3-78
selection when frequency reference loss.
analog frequen- 1: Permits Inverter to process analog fre-
cy reference is quency reference loss.
lost
n046 Frequency ref- Set analog frequency reference input gain. 0 to 3-79
erence gain Set input frequency at 10 V or 20 mA with 200
1% units based on max. frequency set with [100]
n012 as 100%.
n047 Frequency ref- Set analog frequency reference input bias. –100 to 3-79
erence bias Set input frequency at 0 V or 4 mA with 100 [0]
1% units based on max. frequency set with
n012 as 100%.
Analog monitor n048 Multi-function 0: Output frequency (10 V: Max. frequen- 0 to 3 3-79
function selec- analog output cy n012) [0]
tion selection 1: Output current (10 V: Rated inverter
current)
2: Output power (10 V: Rated inverter out-
put capacity)
3: Main circuit DC voltage (10 V: 200-V
class: 400 V; 400-V class: 800V)
n049 Multi-function Set voltage level gain of multi-function 0.01 to 3-80
analog output analog output. 2.00
gain Set n049 to result obtained from dividing [1.00]
voltage of full analog output by 10 V.

3-47
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

H Group 3: n050 to n108


Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-
range ence
page
Carrier frequen- n050 Carrier fre- 1: 2.5 kHz 1 to 10 3-80
cy adjustment quency 2: 5.0 kHz (See
(See note 1) 3: 8.0 kHz note 2)
4: 10.0 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15.0 kHz
7, 8, and 9: Varies in proportion to output
frequency up to 2.5 kHz.
10:7.0 kHz
Instantaneous n051 Selection of 0: Inverter will discontinue running. 0 to 2 3-81
power failure running after 1: Inverter will continue running if power is [0]
processing and restoration fol- supplied again within instantaneous
speed search lowing a mo- power failure compensation time set
control mentary stop with n055.
2: Inverter will always continue running
without detecting UV1 or UV3.
n052 Speed search Set current level enabling speed search in 0 to 3-82
control level 1% units based on rated output current of 200
Inverter as 100%. [110]
n053 Minimum base- Set time to start speed search after RUN 0.5 to 3-82
block time input is ON and instantaneous power fail- 10.0
ure processing starts. (See
note)
n054 V/f characteris- Set percentage of V/f characteristics for 0 to 3-82
tics during speed search. 100
speed search (See
note)
n055 Stop com- Set instantaneous power failure com- 0.0 to 3-82
pensation time pensation time in 1-s units. 2.0
(See
note)
Error retry n056 Number of er- Set number of error retries. 0 to 10 3-83
ror retries [0]
n057 Selection of er- 0: Turns ON error output while error retry 0, 1 [0] 3-83
ror output dur- is performed.
ing error retry 1: Turns OFF error output while error retry
is performed.
Frequency n058 Jump frequen- Set center value of jumping frequency in 0.0 to 3-83
jump cy 1 1-Hz units. 400.0
n059 Jump frequen- Frequency jump function will be invalid if [0.0] 3-84
cy 2 value is set to 0.0.
n060 Jump frequen- Set jump range of jumping frequency in 0.0 to 3-84
cy range 1-Hz units. 25.5
[1.0]

Note 1. For a 400-V Inverter, if the carrier frequency is set to a value higher than the default setting, the
Inverter overload “OL2” detection value will decrease in consideration of an increase in the
heat that will be generated by the change in the carrier frequency.

Note 2. Default settings vary with the Inverter model.

3-48
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Accumulated n061 Total operat- 0: Accumulates power-on time. 0, 1 [1] 3-84
operation time ing time func- 1: Accumulates running time
tion selection
n062 Total operat- Set accumulation start time in 1-h units. 0 to 9,999 3-84
ing time 1 Permits accumulated operation time moni- [0]
(rightmost 4 tor to function. (Same as U-11 and U-12)
digits) Accumulated operation time (h) = n063 x
n063 Total operat- 10,000 + n062 0 to 27 [0] 3-84
ing time 2 Max. value: 279,620 (h) (Returns to 0
(leftmost 2 when accumulated operation time exceeds
digits) 279,620 h)
DC braking n064 DC braking Set DC control current in 1% units based 0 to 100 3-85
current on rated output current of Inverter as [50]
100%.
n065 Stopped DC Set stop DC control time and start DC con- 0.0 to 10.0 3-85
braking time trol time in 1-s units. [0.5]
n066 Startup DC DC control will be invalid if value is set to 0.0 to 10.0 3-85
braking time 0.0. [0.0]
Torque com- n067 Automatic Set automatic torque boost gain. 0.0 to 3.0 3-85
pensation torque boost Setting is usually not necessary. [1.0]
gain
n068 Motor winding Set motor constant for automatic torque 0.000 to 3-85
resistance boost operation. 65.53 (See
Setting is usually not necessary. note 1)
n069 Motor iron 0 to 9,999 3-85
loss (See note
1)
Stall preven- n070 Decelerating 0: Inhibits deceleration stall prevention 0, 1 [1] 3-86
tion stall preven- from functioning.
tion selection 1: Permits deceleration stall prevention to
function.
n071 Accelerating Set current level enabling acceleration stall 30 to 200 3-86
stall preven- prevention in 1% units based on rated out- [170] (See
tion operation put current of Inverter as 100%. note 2)
level
n072 Operating Set current level enabling operation stall 30 to 200 3-86
stall preven- prevention in 1% units based on rated out- [160] (See
tion operation put current of Inverter as 100%. note 2)
level
Optional fre- n073 Frequency Set detecting output frequency in 1-Hz 0.0 to 3-87
quency detec- detection lev- units. 400.0 [0.0]
tion el Valid if multi-function contact output is set
to optional frequency agreement or option-
al frequency detection.

Note 1. Default settings vary with the Inverter model.


Note 2. The default setting for 18.5-kW or higher Inverters is 120%.

3-49
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Overtorque n074 Overtorque 0: Inhibits Inverter from detecting overtor- 0 to 4 3-87
detection detection func- que. [0]
tion selection 1: Inverter will detect overtorque only dur-
ing speed agreement and continue run-
ning with warning after detection.
2: Running Inverter will detect overtorque
and continue running with warning after
detection.
3: Inverter will detect overtorque only dur-
ing speed agreement and turn OFF
output for safety when overtorque is
detected.
4: Running Inverter will always detect
overtorque and turn OFF output for
safety when overtorque is detected.
n075 Overtorque Set overtorque detection current in 1% 30 to 3-87
detection level units based on rated output current of In- 200
verter as 100%. [160]
n076 Overtorque Set overtorque detection time in 1-s units. 0.1 to 3-87
detection time Overtorque will be detected if current larg- 10.0
er than value set with n075 flows for the [0.1]
set time or more.
Timer function n077 Timer function Set time lag between moment timer func- 0.0 to 3-88
ON delay time tion input turns ON and moment timer 25.5
function output turns ON. [0.0]
Valid if multi-function input and multi-func-
tion contact output are set to timer func-
tion.
n078 Timer function Set time lag between the moment the tim- 0.0 to 3-88
OFF delay time er function input turns OFF and the 25.5
moment the timer function output turns [0.0]
OFF.
Valid if multi-function input and multi-func-
tion contact output are set to timer func-
tion.
Braking Resis- n079 Braking resistor 0: Inhibits overheating protection from 0, 1 [0] 3-88
tor Unit over- overheating functioning.
heating protec- protection 1: Permits overheating protection to func-
tion selection tion.
I/O phase loss n080 Input open- Set input phase loss detection level to per- 1 to 3-89
detection phase detec- centage of main circuit DC voltage. 100 [7]
tion level 200-V class: 200 VDC as 100%
400-V class: 800 VDC as 100%
n081 Input open- Set input phase loss detection time. 2 to 3-89
phase detec- Detection time = 1.28 x n n081 255 [8]
tion time Inverter will detect input phase loss if volt-
age as large as or larger than value set
with n080 is imposed continuously for peri-
od exceeding set time.
n082 Output open- Set output phase loss detection level in 0 to 3-89
phase detec- 1% units based on rated output current of 100 [0]
tion level Inverter as 100%.
Output phase loss detection will be invalid
if value is set to 0.

3-50
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
I/O phase loss n083 Output open- Set output phase loss detection time in 1-s 0.0 to 3-89
detection phase detec- units. 2.0
tion time Inverter will detect output phase loss if cur- [0.2]
rent as large as or less than value set with
n082 flows continuously for period exceed-
ing set time.
PID control n084 PID control 0: No PID control. 0 to 3 3-33
function selec- 1: PID control with deviation derivative [0]
tion control.
2: PID control with feedback derivative
control.
3: PID control with negative feedback
characteristic control.
n085 Feedback ad- Fine tuning gain for PID feedback value. 0.00 to 3-34
justment gain 10.00
[1.00]
n086 Proportional Set proportional gain for proportional con- 0.0 to 3-35
gain (P) trol. 10.0
Proportional control will be invalid if value [1.0]
set to 0.0.
n087 Integral time (I) Set integral time with 1 s units for integral 0.0 to 3-35
control. 100.0
Integral control will be invalid if value is set [0.00]
to 0.0.
n088 Derivative time Set derivative time with 1 s units for deriv- 0.00 to 3-35
(D) ative control. 1.00
Derivative control will be invalid if value is [0.00]
set to 0.0.
n089 PID offset ad- Set PID offset with 1% units based on –109 to 3-35
justment max. frequency set with n012 as 100%. 109 [0]
n090 Integral (I) up- Set upper limit of output with 1% units after 0 to 3-35
per limit integral control is performed based on 109
max. frequency set with n012 as 100%. [100]
n091 PID primary Set PID primary-delay time constant with 0.0 to 3-35
delay constant 1 s units for frequency reference after PID 2.5
control is performed. [0.0]
n092 Feedback loss 0: Feedback loss is detected. 0, 1 [0] 3-36
detection selec- 1: Feedback loss is not detected.
tion
n093 Feedback loss Set feedback loss detection level with 1% 0 to 3-36
detection level units. 100 [0]
n094 Feedback loss Set feedback loss detection time with 1 s 0.0 to 3-36
detection time units. 25.5
[1.0]

3-51
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Energy-saving n095 Energy-saving 0: Inhibits the Inverter from performing en- 0, 1 [0] 3-26
control control selec- ergy-saving control.
tion 1: Permits the Inverter to perform energy-
saving control.
n096 Energy-saving Set coefficient so that maximum motor effi- 0.00 to 3-26
coefficient K2 ciency will be obtained. 655.0
(See
note)
n097 Energy-saving Set lower limits of energy-saving control 0 to 3-27
voltage lower output voltage in 1% units at 6 Hz and 120
limit for 60 Hz 60 Hz based on motor rated voltage set [50]
with n011 as 100%, in which case, lower
limit of energy-saving control output volt-
n098 Energy-saving age will be on a straight line linking values 0 to 25 3-28
voltage lower set with n097 and n098 if energy-saving [12]
limit for 6 Hz control output frequency is between 6 and
60 Hz.
n099 Mean power Set time to calculate mean output power of 1 to 3-28
time Inverter performing energy-saving control. 200 [1]
Time (ms) = 25 x n099
n100 Search control Set range of variable voltage in 1% units to 0 to 3-27
voltage limit be used by Inverter in search control mode 100 [0]
based on rated motor input voltage as
100%.
Search operation function will be invalid if
n101 is set to 0.
n101 Search control Set range of variable voltage in 1% units to 0.1 to 3-28
voltage step be used by Inverter in search control mode 10.0
when 100% with 100% search operation start voltage [0.5]
based on rated motor input voltage as
100%.
n102 Search control Set range of variable voltage in 1% units to 0.1 to 3-28
voltage step be used by Inverter in search control mode 10.0
when 5% with 5% search operation start voltage [0.2]
based on rated motor input voltage as
100%.
Not used n103 Not used Do not change setting. 1 [1] ---
n104 Not used Do not change setting. 1 [1] ---
n105 Not used Do not change setting. 0 [0] ---
n106 Not used Do not change setting. 0 [0] ---
n107 Not used Do not change setting. 2 [2] ---
n108 Not used Do not change setting. 1 [1] ---

Note Default settings vary with the Inverter model.

3-52
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Slip compensa- n109 Slip compensa- Slip compensation gain is set as a per- 0.0 to 3-90
tion tion gain centage of the maximum output frequency 9.9
(n014). Use the following equations to set [0.0]
a value that corresponds to the motor
rated slip.
n109 =100 ×
(Synchronization speed – rated motor
speed) ÷ synchronization speed
Synchronization speed = 120f/P
P: No. of polls
f: Rated frequency
Set n014 to the motor’s rated frequency.
Note The rated motor speed can be con-
firmed from the motor’s nameplate.
Note If n109 = 0.0, the slip compensation
function is disabled.
Note If n032 = 0.0, the slip compensation
function is disabled.
n110 Motor no-load Set the motor no-load current as a per- 0 to 99 3-90
current centage of the motor rated current (n032). [30]
Note This setting is used as a parameter of
the slip compensation function.
Note Set after confirming the motor no-
load current with the manufacturer.
Alternatively, calculate the value from
the current when there is no load and
when running at the rated frequency.
n111 Slip compensa- Slip compensation primary delay time is 0.0 to 3-90
tion primary set in s units. 25.5
delay time Note Usually setting is not necessary. Ad- [2.0]
just when slip compensation respon-
siveness is low or when speed has
not stabilized.
When responsiveness is low, de-
crease the set value.
When speed has not stabilized, in-
crease the set value.
Operation n112 Operation Set whether an error is detected when the 0, 1 [0] 3-91
selection at selection at Digital Operator is disconnected.
Digital Operator Digital Operator 0: Error not detected
interruption interruption 1: Error detected
Frequency n113 Frequency Sets the width of frequency agreement 0.0 to 3-91
detection width detection width (n040, n041) and frequency detection 25.5
(n073) in Hz units. [2.0]

3-53
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Operation n114 Operation Select whether or not to ignore run signals 0, 1 [0] 3-91
selection at selection at input while the operation mode is switched
operation mode operation mode using the Operation Mode Selection Key
switching (local/ switching (lo- on the Digital Operator or with operation
remote switch- cal/remote mode selection input from the multi-func-
ing) switching) tion inputs.
0: Run signals that are input during mode
switching are ignored. (Input run sig-
nals after switching the mode.)
1: Run signals become effective immedi-
ately after mode.
Note If n114 is set to 1, when the operation
mode changes the Inverter may start
running immediately. Take steps to
ensure safety for such operation.
(Manufacturer’s n115, For the manufacturer’s use. (Do not set.) See ---
use) n116 note

Note Setting ranges and default settings vary with the Inverter model.

3-5-4 Parameters in Detail


Refer to the following for the functions of the parameters used with the Inverter not in
energy-saving or PID control operation.

n001 Parameter Write Prohibit Selection/Parameter Initialization


Setting range 0, 1, 2, 3, 6, and Unit --- Default setting 1
7
• The parameters used by the Inverter are classified into the following three groups.
Group 1: n001 to n034
Group 2: n035 to n049
Group 3: n050 to n108 (Up to n102 can be used.)
• The Inverter is default-set so that only parameters of group 1 can be set and checked and the parame-
ters of groups 2 and 3 can only be checked.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 The parameters n001 can be set and checked and the parameters n002 to n108 can be only
checked.
1 The parameters of group 1 (i.e., n001 to n034) can be set and checked and the parameters of
groups 2 and 3 (i.e., n035 to n049 and n050 to n108) can be only checked.
2 The parameters of groups 1 and 2 can be set and checked and the parameters of group 3 can
be only checked.
3 The parameters of groups 1, 2, and 3 can be set and checked.
6 All parameters will be set to default-set values.
7 All parameters will be initialized with a three-wire sequence. (see note 2)

3-54
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Note 1. Do not set n001 to any value other than the above.
Note 2. Refer to n035 on page 3-66 for the 3-wire sequence.

n002 Operation Mode Selection


Setting range 0 to 3 Unit --- Default setting 3

• The Inverter has four operation modes. Refer to the following table and select one of the modes with
n002.

Set Values
Set Run command Frequency reference Operation mode indicator of Digital
value Operator
Remote operation Analog input
0 Digital Operator Digital Operator Not lit Not lit
(RUN/STOP Key) (Frequency reference 1)
1 Control circuit terminals Digital Operator Lit Not lit
(Forward/reverse/stop (Frequency reference 1)
input)
2 Digital Operator Control circuit terminals Not lit Lit
(RUN/STOP Key) (Analog input)
(see note 2)
3 Control circuit terminals Control circuit terminals Lit Lit
(Forward/reverse/stop (Analog input)
input) (see note 2)

Note 1. Do not set n002 to any value other than the above.
Note 2. The frequency reference input according to the operation mode selection setting will be used
as frequency reference 1 in multi-step step speed operation. If the frequency reference is
determined by control circuit terminals, the frequency reference input using the control circuit
terminals’ analog input will be enabled and the frequency reference 1 parameter setting
(n025) will be ignored. (If, however, the mode is changed to Local mode using the Digital
Operator, then the value set in n025 will be enabled.)
Note 3. Frequency references 2 to 4 (n026 to n028) and the inching frequency reference (n029) used
in multi-step speed operation will be determined by the parameter settings, regardless of the
operation mode selection setting.

n003 Input Voltage Selection


Setting range 150.0 to 255.0 Unit --- Default setting 200.0 (400.0)
(510.0)

Note The figures in the parentheses apply to the 400-V Inverter.

• Set the input voltage of the Inverter to determine the voltage protection level of the Inverter.

n004 Interruption Mode Selection


Setting range 0 to 3 Unit --- Default setting 0

3-55
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
• Set n004 to the stop mode to be invoked when the STOP/RESET Key is pressed or when the run com-
mand is OFF.
• To inhibit the Inverter from performing the next operation until the motor stops, set n004 to 2 or 3.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Deceleration stop
1 Free running stop
2 Free running stop 1 with timer. The run command during acceleration time 1 or 2 will be ignored.
3 Free running stop 2 with timer. The constant run command is valid. The motor will start running
after acceleration time 1 or 2 passes.

D Deceleration Stop (n004 = 0)


Deceleration rate determined by deceleration
time 1 set with n020 or deceleration time 2
Output frequency set with n022.

Minimum output frequency


(n017)

Stop DC control time (n065)


Run command

D Free Running Stop (n004 = 1)

Output frequency Motor free running

Run command

D Free Running Stop 1 with Timer (n004 = 2)


Deceleration rate determined by deceleration
time 1 set with n020 or deceleration time 2
set with n022.
Output frequency
Set the deceleration time
to a period longer than
Run command the time required by the
ignored. motor to coast to stop.

Run command

Note The run command will not be accepted during the minimum baseblock time set with n053 if the
time required by the motor to coast to stop is shorter than the minimum baseblock time.

3-56
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
D Free Running Stop 2 with Timer (n004 = 3)
Deceleration rate determined by deceleration
time 1 set with n020 or deceleration time 2
set with n022.
Output frequency
Set the deceleration time
to a period longer than
the time required by the
motor to coast to stop.

Run command

Note The run command will not be accepted during the minimum baseblock time set with n053 if the
time required by the motor to coast to stop is shorter than the minimum baseblock time.

n005 Forward/Reverse Rotation Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0
• Set the rotation direction of the motor so that the motor will rotate in the set direction when the forward
rotation command is input.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 The motor seen from the load side rotates counterclockwise.
1 The motor seen from the load side rotates clockwise.

Note If parameter initialization is performed by setting n001 to 6 or 7, n005 will not be initialized. (It will
be initialized, however, if a CPF4 error is generated.)
• The motor is deemed to be rotating forward if the motor seen from the load side is rotating counter-
clockwise unless the forward rotation direction of the motor defined by the manufacturer is opposite.

n006 Reverse Rotation-inhibit Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0
• Select whether reverse rotation will be available or not.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 The motor can rotate in reverse.
1 The motor cannot rotate in reverse.

n007 Operation Direction Selection Key Permit/Inhibit


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 1
• Select with n007 to permit the Operation Mode Selection Key to function or inhibit the Operation Mode
Selection Key from functioning.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Operation direction selection key inhibit
1 Operation direction selection key permit

3-57
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Note Press the Operation Mode Selection Key to control the Inverter from the Digital Operator with the
run command and frequency reference if n007 is set to 1. The operation mode selected with n002
will be valid if the Operation Mode Selection Key is pressed again.

n008 Stop Key Function Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 1

• Set n008 so that the STOP/RESET Key will function properly.


Set Values
Set value Description
0 The STOP/RESET Key will function only when the Inverter is running with the run command
through the Digital Operator.
1 The STOP/RESET Key will function anytime.

n009 Frequency Reference Setting Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 1

• Select with n009 a method to set a frequency reference with the Digital Operator.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Permits the frequency reference set with the Digital Operator to be valid without the Enter Key.
1 Permits the frequency reference set with the Digital Operator to be valid with the Enter Key.

Note A frequency reference will be valid the moment the frequency reference is set with the Digital Op-
erator if n009 is set to 0.

n010 V/f Pattern Selection


Setting range 0 to F Unit --- Default setting 1

Set Values
• The following two methods are available to set the V/f pattern.
S Select one of the 15 V/f patterns preset with the Inverter, in which case set n010 to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, 8, 9, A, b, C, d, or E.
S Set n010 to F for an optional V/f pattern.

3-58
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
• The following are the V/f patterns preset with the Inverter.
Characteristic Use Set Specification
value
General These V/f patterns are mainly used for 0 50 Hz
purpose general purposes, such as the control of
straight conveyor lines. Apply these V/f 1 60 Hz
patterns to the motor if the rotation speed 2 60 Hz. Voltage saturation at 50 Hz.
of the motor must change in almost direct
proportion to the load factor of the motor. 3 72 Hz. Voltage saturation at 60 Hz.
Reduced These V/f patterns are mainly used for fan 4 50 Hz with cube reduction.
torque pumps. Apply these V/f patterns to the 5 50 Hz with square reduction.
motor if the rotation speed of the motor
must change in square or cube proportion 6 60 Hz with cube reduction.
to the load factor of the motor. 7 60 Hz with square reduction.
High starting These V/f patterns are usually 8 50 Hz with low starting torque.
torque unnecessary because the Inverter has a 9 50 Hz with high starting torque.
full automatic torque boost function to
supply enough power to meet the starting A 60 Hz with low starting torque.
torque of the motor. B 60 Hz with high starting torque.
Constant These V/f patterns are used to rotate the C 90 Hz. Voltage saturation at 60 Hz.
power motor with output at 60 Hz or more. Apply
operation these V/f patterns to the motor to impose a D 120 Hz. Voltage saturation at 60 Hz.
constant voltage at 60 Hz minimum on the
E 180 Hz. Voltage saturation at 60 Hz.
motor.
Note 1. Set n010 so that the Inverter will produce high starting torque only in the following cases.
S The wiring distance between the Inverter and the motor is approximately 150 m or more.
S The motor requires high starting torque. The motor requires high starting torque if the motor
is connected a vertical-axis load.
S Power is input to or output from the Inverter through an AC or DC reactor.
Note 2. The set values of n012 to n018 will change automatically if any of the patterns listed in the
above table is selected.
Note 3. Refer to the following graphs for the characteristics of the V/f patterns.
The maximum voltage shown in each of the graphs is 200 V. The actual voltage, however,
corresponds to the set value of n011 (i.e., the rated input voltage of the motor). All voltage
values will change in proportion to the set value of n011. For example, the default-set value of
n011 of the 400-V Inverter is 400 (V). Therefore, double all the voltage values when using the
400-V Inverter.
Characteristics of V/f Patterns
D General Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)

Set value 0 Set value 1 Set value 2 Set value 3

(12) (12) (12) (12)


(6) (6) (6) (6)

3-59
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
D Reduced Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set value 4 Set value 5 Set value 6 Set value 7

(6) (6)
(5) (5)

D High Starting Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 8 to b)


Set value 8 Set value 9 Set value A Set value b

(20) (20)
(15) (15)
(9) (11)
(7) (7)

D Constant Power Operation Characteristics (Set Value: C to E)


Set value C Set value d Set value E

(12) (12) (12)


(6) (6) (6)

Note Figures in parentheses apply to 55-kW or higher Inverters.

n011 Rated Input Voltage of Motor


Setting range 150.0 to 255.0 Unit V Default setting 200.0 (400.0)
(510.0)
• Set the rated input voltage of the motor according to the rated input voltage of the motor before setting
the V/f pattern. This set value will be used to calculate the voltage axis of the V/f pattern.
n012 Maximum Frequency (FMAX)
Setting range 50.0 to 400.0 Unit Hz Default setting 60.0

n013 Maximum Voltage (VMAX)


Setting range 0.1 to 255.0 Unit V Default setting 200.0 (400.0)
(510.0)

3-60
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

n014 Maximum Voltage Frequency (FA)


Setting range 0.2 to 400.0 Unit Hz Default setting 60.0

n015 Intermediate Output Frequency (FB)


Setting range 0.1 to 399.9 Unit Hz Default setting 3.0

n016 Intermediate Output Frequency Voltage (VC)


Setting range 0.1 to 255.0 Unit V Default setting 15.0 (30.0)
(510.0) (See note 2.)

n017 Minimum Output Frequency (FMIN)


Setting range 0.1 to 10.0 Unit Hz Default setting 1.5

n018 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage (VMIN)


Setting range 0.1 to 50.0 Unit V Default setting 10.0 (20.0)
(100.0) (See note 2.)

Note 1. Figures in parentheses apply to the 400-V Inverter.


Note 2. The default settings for 55-kW or higher Inverters are as follows:
200-V 55-kW or higher Inverters: n016 = 12.0 V, n018 = 6.0 V
400-V 55-kW or higher Inverters: n016 = 24.0 V, n018 = 12.0 V
• An optional V/f pattern will be available and n012 to n018 can be set if the V/f pattern is set to F.
Optional V/f Pattern in Detail
Voltage

Frequency
(Hz)

Note The V/f pattern will be a straight line if there is no difference between n015 and n017 in set value,
in which case the set value of n016 will be ignored.

n019 Acceleration Time 1


Setting range 0.0 to 3,600 Unit s Default setting 10.0

n020 Deceleration Time 1


Setting range 0.0 to 3,600 Unit s Default setting 10.0

n021 Acceleration Time 2


Setting range 0.0 to 3,600 Unit s Default setting 10.0

3-61
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

n022 Deceleration Time 2


Setting range 0.0 to 3,600 Unit s Default setting 10.0

• Acceleration time and deceleration time can be set with n019 to n022.
• The acceleration/deceleration time switching command must be selected to use acceleration time 2
and deceleration time 2. Refer to page 3-66, Multi-function Inputs (n035 to n039) for details.
Set Values
• Acceleration time: The time required for the output frequency to be 100% from 0% of the maximum
frequency.
• Deceleration time: The time required for the output frequency to be 0% from 100% of the maximum
frequency.
• Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 will be available if the acceleration/deceleration time
switching command is set.

n023 S-shaped Characteristic Time Selection


Setting range 0, 1, 2, and 3 Unit --- Default setting 1

• The shock of the mechanical system resulting the moment the mechanical system starts or stops can
be reduced with the S-shaped acceleration and deceleration.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 No s-shaped characteristic time
1 S-shaped characteristic time: 0.2 s
2 S-shaped characteristic time: 0.5 s
3 S-shaped characteristic time: 1.0 s

Note The acceleration time and deceleration time of the Inverter will increase by the S-shaped charac-
teristic time set with n023.

With no S-shaped
Output characteristic
frequency

S: S-shaped characteristic time

Time

n024 Unit of Frequency Reference


Setting range 0 to 3,999 Unit --- Default setting 0

3-62
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
• Set the unit of the frequency references set or checked with the Digital Operator.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 0.1-Hz units
1 0.1% units based on the maximum frequency as 100%.
2 to 39 r/min (r/min = 120 x frequency/n024
Set n024 to the number of poles of the motor.
40 to Determine the display method of the maximum frequency set with n012. A frequency less
3,999 than the maximum frequency will be displayed proportionally.
Example: Set n024 to 1100 so that “10.0” will be displayed at the maximum frequency.
10.0 →1100
Value with no decimal point.
Decimal point position

n025 Frequency Reference 1


Setting range 0 to maximum Unit Set with n024 Default setting 6.0
frequency

n026 Frequency Reference 2


Setting range 0 to maximum Unit Set with n024 Default setting 0.0
frequency

n027 Frequency Reference 3


Setting range 0 to maximum Unit Set with n024 Default setting 0.0
frequency

n028 Frequency Reference 4


Setting range 0 to maximum Unit Set with n024 Default setting 0.0
frequency
• Set frequency references 1 to 4.
• The multi-step speed command must be selected to use frequency references 2 to 4.

n029 Inching Frequency Reference


Setting range 0 to maximum Unit Set with n024 Default setting 6.0
frequency
• The inching frequency reference must be set with n029 if an inching frequency is required.
• The inching command must be selected to use the inching frequency reference.

n030 Output Frequency Upper Limit


Setting range 0 to 109 Unit % (Maximum Default setting 100
frequency ratio)

n031 Output Frequency Lower Limit


Setting range 0 to 100 Unit % (Maximum Default setting 0
frequency ratio)

3-63
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
• Set the upper limit and lower limit of the output frequency in 1% units based on the maximum frequen-
cy set with n012 as 100%.
• The Inverter will operate at the lower limit of the output frequency set with n031 if the frequency refer-
ence used by the Inverter is set to 0. The Inverter will not, however, operate if n031 is set to a value
smaller than the minimum output frequency set with n017.
Internal frequency
reference
Output frequency
upper limit (n030)

Output frequency
lower limit (n031)
Set frequency reference

n032 Motor Rated Current


Setting range 10% to 200% of Unit A Default setting See note
rated output
current of In-
verter

Note The default-set value varies with the Inverter model. Refer to the following table.

Set Values
• Set the rated input current of the motor to determine electronic thermal protection characteristics for
the motor.
• The parameter n032 is set to the rated input current of the maximum applicable motor before shipping.

3-64
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

200-V class 400-V class


Model 3G3HV- Max. motor Rated current Model 3G3HV- Max. motor Rated current
capacity (A) capacity (A)
(Default-set) (Default-set)
--- 0.4 kW 1.9 --- 0.4 kW 1.0
--- 0.75 kW 3.3 --- 0.75 kW 1.6
--- 1.5 kW 6.2 --- 1.5 kW 3.1
--- 2.2 kW 8.5 --- 2.2 kW 4.2
A2037 3.7 kW 14.0 A4037 3.7 kW 7.0
A2055 5.5 kW 19.6 A4055 5.5 kW 9.8
A2075 7.5 kW 26.6 A4075 7.5 kW 13.3
A2110 11 kW 39.7 A4110 11 kW 19.9
A2150 15 kW 53.0 A4150 15 kW 36.5
B2185 18.5 kW 65.8 B4185 18.5 kW 32.9
B2220 22 kW 77.2 B4220 22 kW 38.6
B2300 30 kW 105.0 B4300 30 kW 52.3
B2370 37 kW 131.0 B4370 37 kW 65.6
B2450 45 kW 156.0 B4450 45 kW 79.7
B2550 55 kW 190.0 B4550 55 kW 95.0
B2750 75 kW 260.0 B4750 75 kW 130.0
--- --- --- B411K 110 kW 190.0
--- --- --- B416K 160 kW 270.0
--- --- --- B418K 185 kW 310.0
--- --- --- B422K 220 kW 370.0
--- --- --- B430K 300 kW 500.0

n033 Electronic Thermal Protection Function Selection


Setting range 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4 Unit --- Default setting 1

Set Values
Set value Description
0 No protection.
1 For standard motors with standard ratings (with a time constant of 8 min).
2 For standard motors with short-time ratings (with a time constant of 5 min).
3 For dedicated motors with standard ratings (with a time constant of 8 min).
4 For dedicated motors with short-time ratings (with a time constant of 5 min).

Note If more than one motor is operated with a single Inverter, install a thermal relay between the In-
verter and the motor and set n033 to 0.

n034 Selection of Stop Method for when Radiation Fin Overheats


Setting range 0, 1, 2, and 3 Unit --- Default setting 3

• The Inverter will detect the heat sink overheat warning OH1 when the temperature of the heat sink
reaches approximately 90°C. Select a method to interrupt the operation of the Inverter with n034.

3-65
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Deceleration stop in deceleration time 1 set with n020
1 Free running stop
2 Deceleration stop in deceleration time 2 set with n022
3 Continuous operation with warning

Note If n034 is set to 3, the Inverter will display “OH1” when the temperature of the heat sink reaches
approximately 90°C and the Inverter will continue running. If “OH1” is displayed, use a cooling fan
or air conditioner to cool the Inverter. The Inverter will detect the heat sink overheat warning OH2
if the temperature further rises after “OH1” is displayed. The Inverter will stop running immediately
after OH2 is detected to protect its power module from damage so that the motor will coast to stop.

n035 Multi-function Input 1 (S2)


Setting range 0 to 24 Unit --- Default setting 0

n036 Multi-function Input 2 (S3)


Setting range 2 to 24 Unit --- Default setting 2

n037 Multi-function Input 3 (S4)


Setting range 2 to 24 Unit --- Default setting 4

n038 Multi-function Input 4 (S5)


Setting range 2 to 24 Unit --- Default setting 9

n039 Multi-function Input 5 (S6)


Setting range 2 to 27 Unit --- Default setting 10

• The parameters n035 to n039 can be set to the following.


• Each of the set values of n035 to n039 must be unique.

3-66
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Reverse rotation/Stop (2-wire sequence selection) (Only n035 can be set to 0)
1 Stop command (3-wire sequence selection) (Only n035 can be set to 1)
S1 will be used for the run command and S3 will be used for forward/reverse rotation instruction
and the value set with n036 will be ignored.
2 External error (NO contact: ON)
3 External error (NC contact: ON)
4 Error reset (ON: Valid) Error reset will be ignored if the Inverter is running normally.
5 Operation mode selection (ON: Digital Operator; OFF: n002)
6 Not used
7 Emergency stop (ON: The Inverter will decelerate to stop the motor according to acceleration
time 2 set with n022)
To restart the Inverter, turn the run command OFF and ON.
8 Analog input selection (ON: Current input through FI terminal; OFF: FV terminal)
Current input through the FI terminal will be valid if the FI terminal is selected with n042 (i.e.,
analog frequency reference voltage/current selection) set to 1 and no voltage input from the FV
terminal will be valid in any case.
9 Multi-step speed command 1
10 Multi-step speed command 2
11 Inching command (ON: Inching command) This command takes precedence over the frequency
reference.)
12 Acceleration/Deceleration time switching command (ON: Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 will
be used; OFF: Acceleration/Deceleration time 1 will be used)
13 External baseblock command (ON: Valid)
14 External baseblock command (OFF: Valid)
15 Speed search command from max. frequency (ON: Speed search)
16 Speed search command from set frequency (ON: Speed search)
17 Parameter set-inhibit (ON: Invalid)
No parameter settings other than frequency reference settings with the FREF indicator will be
available if parameter set-inhibit is valid.
18 Integral value of PID control reset command (ON: Integral value reset)
19 PID control invalidating command (ON: The target value from the FV terminal becomes the
frequency reference.)
20 Timer function input (Set with n077 and n078)
21 Inverter overheat warning (ON: “OH3” will be displayed and the Inverter will continue running)
22 Analog frequency sample and hold (ON: Sampling and holding)
23 Power OFF stop input (NO contact: Valid when NO contact is ON)
24 Power OFF stop input (NC contact: Valid when NC contact is OFF)
25 Up/Down command (Only n039 can be set to 25)
S5 will be used for up command and S6 will be used for down command and the value set with
n038 will be ignored.
26 Not used.
27 PID input characteristic selection (NO contact: Deviation multiplied by –1 when NO contact is
ON)

3-67
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
D 2-wire Sequence (n035 = 0)
Wiring Example

Forward rotation/Stop

Reverse rotation/Stop

Operation Example

Forward rotation

Motor operation

Reverse rotation

Forward rotation/Stop
(S1)

Reverse rotation/Stop
(S2)
(Forward and reverse
rotation commands input EF detection
simultaneously)

D 3-wire Sequence (n035 = 1)


Wiring Example
Stop switch Operation switch
(NC) (NO)
Run command (Operates when the
operation switch is closed)
Stop command (Stops when the stop
switch is open)
Forward/Reverse rotation command

3-68
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Operation Example
Forward rotation

Motor operation

Reverse rotation

Run command
(S1)

Stop command
(S2)
Forward/Reverse
rotation command
(S3)

D Multi-step Speed Command (Set Value = 9 or 10)


Operation Example
Frequency
Output reference 4
frequency Frequency
Frequency reference 3
reference 2
Frequency
reference 1

Forward
rotation/Stop
(S1)
Multi-step speed
command 1
Multi-step speed
command 2

D Inching Frequency Reference (Set Value = 11)


Operation Example
Output Frequency
frequency reference 1

Inching frequency Inching frequency


reference reference

Forward
rotation/Stop
(S1)
Inching
command

3-69
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
D Acceleration/Deceleration Time Switching Command (Set Value = 12)
Operation Example
Deceleration Acceleration
time1 time2
Output
frequency Acceleration
time 1
Deceleration
time2

Forward
rotation/
Stop (S1)

Acceleration/Deceleration
time switching reference

D External Baseblock Command (Set Value = 13 or 14)


The baseblock command can be input remotely to the Inverter by setting n035 to 13 (i.e., the NO contact
is ON) or to 14 (i.e., the NC contact is OFF).
The baseblock is the status of the Inverter with output turned OFF. The motor will coast to a stop if the
baseblock command is input to the Inverter. The Inverter, however, will hold the output frequency and if
the baseblock command is released, a speed search will be carried out from the frequency held by the
Inverter, and the motor will be restarted. To clear the held frequency, turn OFF the run command. When
the run command is turned OFF, the held frequency will change to zero.

D Speed Search Command (Set Value = 15 or 16)


The Inverter in speed search operation restarts the motor without stopping the motor while the motor is
coasting.
The Inverter in speed search operation makes it possible to smoothly switch over power supply to the
motor from commercial power supply to the output power of the Inverter.
Program a sequence to input the run command and speed search command simultaneously or the run
command after the speed search command. The speed search command will be ignored if the run com-
mand is input earlier than the speed search command.
Operation Example
Maximum frequency
Output frequency or set frequency

Minimum baseblock Speed search


operation
time (n053)
Forward
rotation/Stop
(S1)
5 ms min. Minimum baseblock time (n053) or more
Speed search
command

3-70
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Note 1. The Inverter in speed search operation will work according to the speed search V/f character-
istics set with n054 and when the output current becomes less than the speed search opera-
tion level set with n052, the Inverter will have normal acceleration output.
Note 2. The speed search command must be ON for at least the minimum baseblock time set with
n053 after the run command is input, otherwise the speed search operation is not available.
Note 3. Adjust the minimum baseblock time set with n053 for the most suitable timing to start the
speed search operation.
Note 4. It is usually not necessary to change the default-set values of n052 and n054. Set n052 to a
smaller value if the motor does not restart after the speed search operation completes.
Note 5. Input the run command in 5 ms or more after the speed search command is input to permit the
Inverter to be in reliable speed search operation.

D Integral Value of PID Control Reset Command/PID Control Invalidating Command


(Set Value = 18 or 19)
• Integral Value Reset (Set Value = 18)
If the integral value reset command is input, the integral value used for PID control will be reset and the
integral operation output will be zero.
The integral operation output will remain zero while this command is input.
Input this command to stop the integral operation to temporarily prevent rapid changes of the output of
the Inverter.
• PID Control Invalidating Command (Set Value = 19)
Use this command to change the type of control performed by the Inverter from PID control, such as
JOG control, to the usual control, such as constant speed control with a frequency reference, and vice
versa.
The Inverter will stop performing PID control if this command is input and the Inverter will use input to
the FV terminal as a frequency reference. If n002 is set to 0 or 1, however, the Inverter will use frequen-
cy references 1 to 4.

D PID Input Characteristic Selection (Set Value: 27)


Note This can only be set in n039.
It is possible to switch the input characteristic for PID control. The PID control deviation can be multiplied
by –1 to control sensors with negative characteristics. “Negative characteristic” refers to operation
where the feedback value decreases when the Inverter’s output frequency increases. This function is
useful for control that alternates between positive and negative characteristics because of the changing
direction of the motor. Control that has a constantly negative characteristic can be achieved by setting
PID control function selection (n084) to 3.

D Timer Function Input (Set Value = 20)


Timer function input is a standard sequential input. By setting appropriate delay time values with n077
and n078, the Inverter can prevent the sensor from chattering.
The Inverter will turn ON timer function output if timer function input to the Inverter is ON for a period
longer than the timer function ON-delay time set with n077.
The Inverter will turn OFF timer function output if timer function input to the Inverter is OFF for a period
longer than the timer function OFF-delay time set with n078.

3-71
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Operation Example
Timer function
input

Timer function
output

D Inverter Overheat Warning (Set Value = 21)


If this signal is input, “OH3” will be displayed by the Inverter.
This signal can be used to detect the overheating of the Braking Resistor Unit, Control Unit, and motor.

D Analog Frequency Sample and Hold (Set Value = 22)


If this signal is ON for 0.1 s or more, the Inverter will sample and hold the analog frequency reference
being used.
The Inverter will continue to keep the frequency on hold.
The Inverter will save the frequency on hold as frequency reference 1 value of n025 so that the value will
not be lost after the Inverter is turned OFF if n044 is set to 1.
Operation Example

Output frequency

Frequency
Frequency Analog input reference
reference
(Analog input)

Analog frequency
sample and hold
Forward
rotation/Stop
(S1)

Power supply

Note The frequency on hold will be lost when the Inverter is turned OFF if n044 is set to 0.

D Power OFF Stop Input (Set Value = 23 or 24)


Power OFF stop input shortens the deceleration time of the motor when power supply to the Inverter is
OFF.

3-72
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
If this signal is ON, the Inverter will decelerate the motor to stop according to deceleration time 2 set with
n022 when the Inverter detects a voltage drop of power supply to the Inverter.

D Up/Down Command (Set Value = 25)


The up/down command controls the output frequency according to input to S5 and S6.
S5 (multi-function input 4) will be used for the up command, S6 (multi-function input 5) will be used for
the down command, and value set with n038 will be ignored if n039 is set to 25.
Multi-function input 4 (S5): Up command ON OFF ON OFF
Multi-function input 5 (S6): Down command OFF ON ON OFF
Operation status Acceleration Acceleration Hold Hold

Note 1. The up/down command is valid only if n002 (i.e., operation mode selection) is set to 1 or 3.
Note 2. The Inverter will accelerate or decelerate the motor according to the acceleration time or de-
celeration time set with n019 to n022 if the up/down command is input.
Note 3. The following are the upper and lower limits of the output frequency when the Inverter acceler-
ates or decelerates the motor with the up/down command.
Upper limit: Maximum frequency (n012) x output frequency upper limit (n030)/100
Lower limit: Maximum frequency (n012) x output frequency lower limit (n031)/100
If an analog frequency reference is input through the FV or FI terminal and the value of the
analog frequency reference is larger the above lower limit, the lower limit of the output fre-
quency will be determined by the analog frequency reference.
Note 4. The initial output frequency is 0.0 Hz if n039 is set to 25. The output frequency will reach the
lower limit when the up/down command is input.
Note 5. Turn ON input to S5 or S6 while the run command is OFF to set the frequency reference used
by the Inverter to zero.
Note 6. The multi-step speed command is invalid if n039 is set to 25.

3-73
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Operation Example
Output frequency
Upper limit
Output frequency
will reach lower
limit with input to
S5 or S6.
Same frequency
Lower limit

Forward
rotation/Stop
(S1)

Up command
(S5)
Frequency reference reset

Down command
(S6)

Frequency
agreement signal

Power supply
Note: The frequency synchronization signal is ON when the run command is ON
while the Inverter is not in acceleration or deceleration mode.

n040 Multi-function Contact Output 1 (MA-MB-MC)


Setting range 0 to 17 Unit --- Default setting 0

n041 Multi-function Contact Output 2 (M1-M2)


Setting range 0 to 17 Unit --- Default setting 1

• The functions of multi-function contact output 1 (MA, MB, and MC) and multi-function contact output 2
(M1 and M2) can be selected from the following.

3-74
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Error (ON: Error)
1 Running (ON: Running) (See note.)
2 Frequency agreement (ON: Frequency agreement)
3 Optional frequency agreement (ON: Optional frequency agreement)
4 Optional frequency detection (ON: Output frequency x n073) (See note.)
5 Optional frequency detection (ON: Output frequency y n073) (See note.)
6 Overtorque (ON: Detected)
Set the detection method with n074, the detection level with n075, and the detection time with
n076.
7 Overtorque (OFF: Detected)
Set the detection method with n074, the detection level with n075, and the detection time with
n076.
8 Baseblock (ON: Subject to the baseblock.)
9 Operation mode (ON: Digital Operator/Frequency reference)
10 Inverter ready (ON: Ready)
Ready: The Inverter is turned ON and ready to operate normally.
11 Timer function output (Set with n077 and n078)
12 Error retrying (Valid if the error retry function is set with n056)
13 Inverter/Motor overload warning (ON: Warning)
Inverter overload warning: ON when the output of the Inverter is 150% of the rated output
continuously for 48 s.
Motor overload warning: ON when the motor is overloaded for a period as long as 80% of the
motor overload protective time.
14 Frequency reference loss (ON: Loss)
Set n045 (i.e., analog frequency reference loss processing) to 1 (i.e., valid).
Frequency reference loss is a phenomenon resulting in a value drop of a frequency reference
by 90% or more within 0.4 s.
If the Inverter detects frequency reference loss, the Inverter will continue running at a frequency
20% lower than the previous frequency.
15 Not used
16 PID feedback loss (ON: Loss)
The Inverter will detect PID feedback loss if n092 (i.e., feedback loss selection) is set to 1.
Set the feedback loss detection level with n093 and the feedback loss detection time with n094.
17 Heating heat sink (ON: OH1 will be detected)

Note Set values 1, 4, and 5 can be used as timing signals for braking.

3-75
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
D Frequency Agreement (Set Value = 2)
Operation Example
Releasing width
Output frequency Sensing width ±4 Hz
Frequency
±2 Hz reference

Frequency
agreement signal

D Optional Frequency Agreement (Set Value = 3)


Operation Example
Releasing width
Output frequency ±4 Hz
Sensing width Optional frequency
±2 Hz detection level (n073)

Optional frequency
agreement signal

D Optional Frequency Detection: Output Frequency x Frequency Detection Level


(Set Value = 4)
Operation Example
Output frequency

Releasing Optional frequency


width ±2 Hz detection level (n073)

Frequency Detection
signal

3-76
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
D Optional Frequency Detection: Output Frequency y Frequency Detection Level
(Set Value = 5)
Operation Example

Output frequency

Optional Frequency
Detection Level Releasing width
(n073) ±2 Hz

Frequency Detection
signal

Note The detection widths and release widths for frequency agreement, optional frequency agree-
ment, and optional frequency detection can be changed with the settings for the frequency detec-
tion width parameter (n113).
Frequency agreement, optional frequency agreement: Detection width = Value set for n113
Release width = Twice value set for n113
Optional frequency detection: Release width = Value set for n113

D Overtorque Detection (Set Value = 6 and 7)


The Inverter will detect an increase in the output current resulted from the motor with an excessive load
and output an alarm signal as multi-function contact output if n074 (i.e., overtorque detection function
selection) is set to 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Operation Example

Motor current
(See note) (See note)
n075

Overtorque detection
signal (with value set
to 6)
Note: The release width of overtorque detection is approximately 5% of the rated output current.

D Timer Function Output (Set Value = 11)


Refer to page 3-71, Timer Function Input (Set Value = 20).

n042 Analog Frequency Reference Voltage/Current Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0

3-77
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
• Select the FV terminal to input the frequency reference within a voltage range from 0 to 10 VDC or the
FI terminal to input the frequency reference within a current range from 4 to 20 mA with n042.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 The FV terminal can be used for the analog frequency reference within a voltage range from 0
to 10 VDC.
1 The FI terminal can be used for the analog frequency reference. Set the input level with n043.

Note 1. The FI terminal is a current input terminal for 4 to 20 mA. The FI terminal can be a voltage input
terminal by changing the FI input level with n043 and cutting the jumper wire of the PCB. Do
not, however, change the FI terminal to a voltage input terminal unless the Inverter is used for
PID control.
Note 2. Set n042 according to the type of frequency reference.

n043 FI Input Level Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 1

• Set the FI input level with n043 so that the FI terminal will become a current or voltage input.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Voltage input within a range from 0 to 10 V. Be sure to cut jumper wire J1.
1 Current input within a range from 4 to 20 mA.

Note Do not impose voltage on the Inverter without cutting jumper wire J1 if n043 is set to 0, otherwise
the input resistor of the Inverter will burn out.
Refer to page 3-34 for the position of the jumper wire.

n044 Analog Frequency Reference Sample Hold Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0

• Set n044 when using the analog frequency sample and hold as multi-function input.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Frequency reference on hold is saved by n025
1 Frequency reference on hold is not saved.

n045 Processing Selection when Analog Frequency Reference is


Lost
Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0

• Set n045 to 0 or 1 to determine the operation of the Inverter when the frequency reference input to the
FV or FI terminal drops sharply.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Inhibits Inverter from processing analog frequency reference loss.
1 Permits Inverter to process analog frequency reference loss.

3-78
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Note 1. Frequency reference loss is a phenomenon resulting in a value drop of a frequency reference
by 90% or more within 0.4 s.
If the Inverter detects frequency reference loss, the Inverter will continue running at a
frequency 20% lower than the previous frequency.
Note 2. To permit the Inverter to output a signal indicating that the Inverter is processing frequency
reference loss, set n040 (i.e., multi-function contact output 1) or n041 (i.e., multi-function con-
tact output 2) to 14.

n046 Frequency Reference Gain


Setting range 0 to 200 Unit % Default setting 100

n047 Frequency Reference Bias


Setting range –100 to 100 Unit % Default setting 0

• Set the frequency reference gain with n046 and the frequency reference bias with n047.
Set Values
• n046: The frequency for 10 V or 20 mA input can be set in 1% units based on the maximum frequency
set with n012 as 100%.
• n047: The frequency for 0 V or 4 mA input can be set in 1% units based on the maximum frequency
set with n012 as 100%.

Frequency reference
Maximum frequency x
frequency reference
gain/100

Maximum frequency x
frequency reference
bias/100
Values in parentheses apply
0V 10 V when the frequency refer-
(4 mA) (20 mA) ence is input with current.

n048 Multi-function Analog Output Selection


Setting range 0, 1, 2, and 3 Unit --- Default setting 0

• Set the n048 so that the type of signal of multi-function analog output terminals AM and AC will be
determined.
Set Values (n048)
Set value Description
0 Output frequency (10 V: Max. frequency n012)
1 Output current (10 V: Rated inverter current)
2 Output power (10 V: Rated inverter output capacity)
3 Main circuit DC voltage (10 V: 200-V class: 400 V; 400-V class: 800V)

3-79
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

n049 Multi-function Analog Output Gain


Setting range 0.01 to 2.00 Unit Times Default setting 1.00

• The parameter n049 is used to adjust the analog output gain.


Set Values
• Set n049 to the result obtained from dividing the voltage of the full analog output by 10 V.
• For example, set n048 to 0 and n049 to 0.30 when connecting multi-function analog output terminals
AM and AC to a frequency meter that operates at 3 V maximum. Refer to the following diagram.

Analog Output
10 V Default set

Frequency meter 3V
(FS: 1 mA at 3 V)

Maximum frequency

n050 Carrier Frequency


Setting range 1 to 9 Unit --- Default setting See note

Note The default-set value of n050 varies with the Inverter model.
• Set the switching frequency (carrier frequency) of the output transistor of the Inverter with n050.
• The noise generation and current leakage of the Inverter will be low if the carrier frequency is set low, in
which case, the motor will generate a more metallic noise.
Set Values
Set value Description
1 2.5 kHz
2 5.0 kHz
3 8.0 kHz
4 10.0 kHz
5 12.5 kHz
6 15.0 kHz
7 to 9 Varies in proportion to output frequency up to 2.5 kHz. (Refer to the following graphs)
10 7.0 kHz

Note 1. The carrier frequency setting range varies depending on the Inverter capacity.
200-V class and 400-V class, 22 kW max.: 0.4 to 15.0 kHz max.
200-V class, 30 to 75 kW; 400-V class, 30 to 160 kW: 0.4 to 10.0 kHz max.
400-V class, 185 to 300 kW: 0.4 to 2.5 kHz max.
Note 2. For a 400-V Inverter, if the carrier frequency is set to a value higher than the default setting, the
Inverter’s rated output current will decrease as shown in the following table. If the Inverter
overload “OL2” is detected prior to the motor overload “OL1,” decrease the carrier frequency
setting.

3-80
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

400-V Inverter English Models (Japanese Models) Models conforming to EN standards


capacity 3G3HV-Aj-E(-Aj) 3G3HV-Aj-CUE/-CE
Default Drop in Drop in Default Drop in Drop in
setting rating at rating at setting rating at rating at
10 kHz 15 kHz 10 kHz 15 kHz
0.4 to 2.2 kW --- --- --- 6 (15.0 kHz) 100% 95%
3.7 to 5.5 kW 6 (15.0 kHz) 100% 100% 6 (15.0 kHz) 100% 95%
7.5 kW 5 (12.5 kHz) 100% 90% 4 (10.0 kHz) 100% 80%
11 kW 5 (12.5 kHz) 100% 90% 5 (12.5 kHz) 100% 95%
15/18.5 kW 5 (12.5 kHz) 100% 90% 4 (10.0 kHz) 100% 80%
22 kW 4 (10.0 kHz) 100% 80% 4 (10.0 kHz) 85% 50%
30 kW 3 (8.0 kHz) 85% --- 3 (8.0 kHz) 85% ---
37 kW 3 (8.0 kHz) 85% --- 2 (5.0 kHz) 60% ---
45 kW 10 (7.0 kHz) 75% --- 2 (5.0 kHz) 60% ---
55 to 160 kW 2 (5.0 kHz) 60% --- 2 (5.0 kHz) 60% ---
185 to 300 kW 9 (2.5 kHz --- ---
max.)

n050 = 7 n050 = 8
Carrier frequency (fc) Carrier frequency (fc)

2.5 kHz 2.5 kHz

1.0 kHz 1.0 kHz

Output frequency
(fout) Output frequency
83.3 Hz 208.3 Hz 41.6 Hz 104.1 Hz (fout)
n050 = 9
Carrier frequency (fc)
2.5 kHz

1.0 kHz

Output frequency
27.7 Hz 69.4 Hz (fout)

n051 Selection of Running After Restoration Following a


Momentary Stop
Setting range 0, 1, and 2 Unit --- Default setting 0

3-81
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
• Select with n051 a method to process instantaneous power failure.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Inverter will discontinue running.
1 Inverter will continue running if power is supplied again within instantaneous power failure
compensation time set with n055. (see note 1)
2 Inverter will always continue running without detecting UV1 or UV3. (see notes 1 and 2)

Note 1. Keep the run command ON to permit the Inverter to restart operation automatically when
power is supplied to the Inverter after the operation of the Inverter is interrupted due to an
instantaneous power failure.
Note 2. If n051 is set to 2, the Inverter will restart running after supply voltage to the Inverter returns to
normal and the Inverter will not detect error output signals.

n052 Speed Search Control Level


Setting range 0 to 200 Unit % (Rated output Default setting 110
current ratio)
• Set with n052 a current level in 1% units based on the rated output current as 100% which enables the
Inverter to determine the completion of the speed search control.
• It is usually not necessary to change the default-set value.
• To permit the Inverter to use the speed search function, set the multi-function input parameter used by
the Inverter to 15 or 16 so that the speed search command will be input to the Inverter.
• When the output current becomes less than the value set with n054, the Inverter in speed search con-
trol will detect the synchronous speed and the Inverter will be in acceleration mode.

n053 Minimum Baseblock Time


Setting range 0.5 to 10.0 Unit s Default setting See note

Note The default-set value varies with the Inverter model.


• Set with n053 time in 1-s units to start the speed search control after RUN input is ON and instanta-
neous power failure processing starts. Refer to page 3-70, Speed Search Command.

n054 V/f Characteristics During Speed Search


Setting range 0 to 100 Unit % (Usual V/f Default setting See note
characteristics
ratio)

Note The default-set value varies with the Inverter model.


• Set percentage of V/f characteristics for speed search.
• It is usually not necessary to change the default-set value.

n055 Stop Compensation Time


Setting range 0.0 to 2.0 Unit s Default setting See note

Note The default-set value varies with the Inverter model.

3-82
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
• Set instantaneous power failure compensation time in 1-s units.
• It is usually not necessary to change the default-set value.

n056 Number of Error Retries


Setting range 0 to 10 Unit Times Default setting 0

! Caution The Inverter may be damaged if the error retry function is used.

! Caution Given that the Inverter may be damaged if the error retry function is used, connect a
no-fuse breaker to the Inverter and program a sequence to interrupt the operation of
peripheral devices when the Inverter is error.

• The error retry function permits the Inverter to restart operation automatically, even if the Inverter is
error.
• Use the error retry function only in case the interruption of the operation of the mechanical system is
not desired, even if the Inverter may be damaged.
• The error retry function is valid for the following errors. A protection function of the Inverter will work if
the Inverter has any other error.
OC (Overcurrent)
OV (Main circuit overvoltage)
UV1 (Main circuit undervoltage)
GF (Ground fault)
RR (Control transistor overheat)
• The number of error retries counted will be cleared in the following cases.
When the Inverter is in normal operation for 10 minutes after an error retry.
When the Inverter receives error reset input after the Inverter detects an error with a protection
function.
When the Inverter is turned OFF and ON.
• To permit the Inverter to output an error retry signal, set the multi-function contact output parameter
used by the Inverter to 12.

n057 Selection of Error Output during Error Retry


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0
• Select with n057 whether to permit the Inverter to turn ON error output while the Inverter is in error retry
operation.
• To permit the Inverter to turn ON error output while the Inverter is in error retry operation, set the multi-
function contact output parameter used by the Inverter to 0.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Turns ON error output while error retry is performed.
1 Turns OFF error output while error retry is performed.

n058 Jump Frequency 1


Setting range 0.0 to 400.0 Unit Hz Default setting 0.0

3-83
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

n059 Jump Frequency 2


Setting range 0.0 to 400.0 Unit Hz Default setting 0.0

n060 Jump Frequency Range


Setting range 0.0 to 25.5 Unit Hz Default setting 1.0
• The frequency jump prevents the Inverter from generating frequencies that make the mechanical sys-
tem resonate.
• The frequency jump can be used effectively to make dead bands for frequency references.
• Set with n058 and n059 the center values of jumping frequencies.
• The value set with n059 must be as large as or larger than the value set with n059, otherwise OPE6
(improper parameter setting) will result.
• Set with n060 a jump frequency width.
Output
frequency

Frequency
reference

n061 Total Operating Time Function Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 1

n062 Total Operating Time 1 (Rightmost 4 Digits)


Setting range 0 to 9,999 Unit h Default setting 0

n063 Total Operating Time 2 (Leftmost 2 Digits)


Setting range 0 to 27 Unit x 10,000 h Default setting 0
• Select with n061 whether to permit the Inverter to accumulate the power-ON time or operation time of
the Inverter.
Set Values (n061)
Set value Description
0 Accumulates power-ON time
1 Accumulates operation time
• Set with n062 and n063 the initial operation time of the Inverter. The accumulated operation time of the
Inverter can be obtained from the following.
Accumulated operation time (h) = n063 x 10,000 + n062
• The parameters n062 and n063 can be used to monitor the accumulated operation time of the Inverter.
• The maximum value of the accumulated operation time set with n062 and n063 is 279620 (h). When
the value of the accumulated operation time exceeds 279620, n062 and n063 will be set to 0.

3-84
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3

n064 DC Braking Current


Setting range 0 to 100 Unit % (Rated output Default setting 50
current ratio)

• Set DC control current with 1% units based on rated output current of Inverter as 100%.

n065 Stopped DC Braking Time


Setting range 0.0 to 10.0 Unit s Default setting 0.5

• Set with n065 DC control time in 1-s units to stop the motor.
• The Inverter will not perform DC control to stop the motor if n065 is set to 0.0.
• The DC control time set with n065 is valid if n004 (i.e., stop mode selection) is set to 0 (i.e., decelera-
tion stop mode). The Inverter will not perform DC control if a free running stop mode is selected with
n004.

n066 Startup DC Braking Time


Setting range 0.0 to 10.0 Unit s Default setting 0.0

• The parameter n066 is used to stop the motor that is coasting and restart the motor.
• Set with n065 DC control time in 1-s units to start the motor.
• The Inverter will not perform DC control to start the motor if n066 is set to 0.0.

Stop DC Control Start DC Control

Output Output
frequency frequency

Minimum output Minimum output


frequency frequency

Time Time
Stopped DC braking Startup DC braking
time (n065) time (n066)

n067 Automatic Torque Boost Gain


Setting range 0.0 to 3.0 Unit Times Default setting 1.0

n068 Motor Winding Resistance


Setting range 0.000 to 65.53 Unit Ω Default setting See note

n069 Motor Iron Loss


Setting range 0 to 9,999 Unit W Default setting See note

Note The default-set values of n068 and n069 vary with the Inverter model.

3-85
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
• The parameters n067, n068, and n069 are used for torque compensation.
• It is usually not necessary to change the default-set values.
• Set n067 to a larger value if the wiring distance between the Inverter and motor is long and a smaller
value if the motor vibrates.
• Set with n068 the coil resistance of the motor and n069 the core loss of the motor if the coil resistance
and core loss are known. The parameters n068 and n069 will probably make the torque boost function
more effective.

n070 Decelerating Stall Prevention Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 1

• Select with n070 a method to process the overvoltage error of the Inverter decelerating the motor.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Inhibits deceleration stall prevention from functioning.
1 Permits deceleration stall prevention to function.

Note 1. Be sure to set n070 to 0 if the Braking Resistor Unit is connected to the Inverter, otherwise the
Braking Resistor Unit will not work.
Note 2. The Inverter will automatically extend time to decelerate the motor so that no overvoltage er-
ror will result if n070 is set to 1.
Operation Example

Output
frequency Deceleration time is controlled
so that no overvoltage error will
result.

Deceleration time
(Set value)

n071 Accelerating Stall Prevention Operation Level


Setting range 30 to 200 Unit % (Rated output Default setting 170 (See note.)
current ratio)

n072 Operating Stall Prevention Operation Level


Setting range 30 to 200 Unit % (Rated output Default setting 160 (See note.)
current ratio)

Note The default setting for 18.5-kW or higher Inverters is 120.

3-86
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
• The parameters n071 and n072 are used to lower the output frequency to levels to enable the Inverter
to continue operating the motor without stalling.
• Set with n071 and n072 current levels in 1% units based on the rated output current as 100% to enable
the acceleration and operation stall prevention functions to work.

Acceleration Stall Prevention Operation Stall Prevention


Operation Operation
Stall Stall
Prevention Prevention

Time Time

Output Output
frequency frequency

The output frequency is controlled to a The output frequency is controlled to a


level to enable the Inverter to continue level to enable the Inverter to continue
operating the motor without stalling. operating the motor without stalling.
Time Time

n073 Frequency Detection Level


Setting range 0.0 to 400.0 Unit Hz Default setting 0.0

• The parameter n073 is used to detect the output frequency.


• The Inverter will output a signal as a multi-function contact output while the output frequency is higher
than, lower than, or the same as the frequency set with n073.
• Set n040 and n041 (i.e., multi-function contact output selection):
To 3 to permit the Inverter to output a signal while the output frequency is the same as the frequency
set with n073.
To 4 to permit the Inverter to output a signal while the output frequency is the same as or lower than
the frequency set with n073.
To 5 to permit the Inverter to output a signal while the output frequency is the same as or higher than
the frequency set with n073. Refer to page 3-76.

n074 Overtorque Detection Function Selection


Setting range 0 to 4 Unit --- Default setting 0

n075 Overtorque Detection Level


Setting range 30 to 200 Unit % (Rated output Default setting 160
current ratio)

n076 Overtorque Detection Time


Setting range 0.1 to 10.0 Unit s Default setting 0.1

3-87
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
• The parameters n074, n075, and n076 are used to set the overtorque detection function.
• Select with n074 whether to permit the Inverter to detect overtorque and a method to process the over-
torque.
• The Inverter will detect overtorque if the output current as large as or larger than the detection level set
with n075 flows for a period as long as or longer than the detection time set with n076.
• Set with n075 an overtorque detection current level in 1% units based on the rated output current as
100%.
• Set with n076 overtorque detection time in 1-s units.
• Refer to page 3-77 to permit the Inverter to output an overtorque detection signal as multi-function
contact output.
Set Values (n074)
Set value Description
0 Inhibits Inverter from detecting overtorque.
1 Inverter will detect overtorque only during speed agreement and continue running with a
warning after detection.
2 Running Inverter will detect overtorque and continue running with a warning after detection.
3 Inverter will detect overtorque only during speed agreement and turn OFF output for safety
when overtorque is detected.
4 Running Inverter will always detect overtorque and turn OFF output for safety when overtorque
is detected.

n077 Timer Function ON Delay Time


Setting range 0.0 to 25.5 Unit s Default setting 0.0

n078 Timer Function OFF Delay Time


Setting range 0.0 to 25.5 Unit s Default setting 0.0

• The parameters n077 and n078 are used to set the timer function.
• To permit the Inverter to use the timer function, set the multi-function input parameter used by the In-
verter to 20 for timer function input and the multi-function contact output parameter used by the Invert-
er to 11 for timer function output.
• Set with n077 delay time in1-s units to permit the Inverter to turn ON timer function output after timer
function input is ON.
• Set with n078 delay time in 1-s units to permit the Inverter to turn OFF timer function output after timer
function input is OFF.
• Refer to page 3-71, Timer Function Input (Set Value = 20) for the timer function in detail.

n079 Braking Resistor Overheating Protection Selection


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0

3-88
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
• Select with n079 whether to permit the Inverter to protect the Braking Resistor Unit connected to the
Inverter from overheating.
• The Inverter will display an error and turn OFF the output power when the Inverter detects the over-
heating of the Braking Resistor Unit with the RH signal if n079 is set to 1.
Set Values
Set value Description
0 Inhibits overheating protection from functioning.
1 Permits overheating protection to function.

n080 Input Open-phase Detection Level


Setting range 1 to 100 Unit (400/800 VDC Default setting 7
as 100%)

n081 Input Open-phase Detection Time


Setting range 2 to 255 Unit x 1.28 s Default setting 8

• The parameters n080 and n081 are used to set the input phase loss detection function.
• It is usually not necessary to change the default-set values.
• The Inverter will not detect input phase loss if n080 is set to 100.
• Set n080 of the 200-V Inverter based on 400 VDC as 100% and that of the Inverter of 400-V class
based on 800 VDC as 100%.
• The input phase loss detection function is used to detect the voltage ripples that will be generated from
the main circuit DC power supply when input phase loss results.
The Inverter will detect input phase loss if the voltage width of the voltage ripples of the main circuit DC
power supply exceeds the range set with n080 for a period exceeding the time set with n081.
• If the power supplied to the Inverter has ripples, set n080 or n081 to a large value so that the Inverter
will not detect input phase loss.

n082 Output Open-phase Detection Level


Setting range 0 to 100 Unit % (Rated output Default setting 0
current ratio)

n083 Output Open-phase Detection Time


Setting range 0.0 to 2.0 Unit s Default setting 0.2

• The parameters n082 and n083 are used to set the output phase loss detection function.
• The Inverter will not detect output phase loss if n082 is set to 0. The default-set value of n082 is 0.
• When an output phase loss occurs, the Inverter will detect a decrease in the output current of the
phase.
• To use the output phase loss detection function, refer to the following procedure and set with n082 an
appropriate output phase loss detection level.

1. Start the motor with no load.


2. Use the Digital Operator and monitor the amperage of the output current.

3-89
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
3. Calculate the percentage of the output current based on the rated output current as 100%.
4. Set n082 to half the number calculated.

n109 Slip Compensation Gain


Setting range 0.0 to 9.9 Unit % (Motor rated Default setting 0.0
frequency)

n110 Motor No-load Current


Setting range 0 to 99 Unit % (Motor rated Default setting 30
current n032)

n111 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time


Setting range 0.0 to 25.5 Unit s Default setting 2.0

• The slip compensation function keeps the rotating speed of the motor constant if the load is heavy.
Without this function, the motor will slip and the rotating speed of the motor will decrease if the load is
heavy.
• If the output current of the Inverter is equal to the electronic thermal reference current (i.e., the rated
current of the motor), add the compensation frequency equivalent to the rated slippage value of the
motor to the output frequency.
• Refer to the following formulas to obtain the constants to be set in n109 and n110.
n109 = (Synchronization speed – rated motor revolution)/synchronization speed × 100
Synchronization speed = 120f/P
P: No. of polls
f: Rated frequency
n110 = (Output current with no load/rated current of the motor) × 100
• The compensation frequency (fc) can be obtained from the following.
If the output frequency is lower than the constant set in n26 for the maximum voltage frequency, use
the following formula to obtain the compensation frequency (fc).
fc = n014 × n109 × [output current – (n032 × n110/100)]/[n032 – (n032 × n110/100)]
If the output frequency is equal to or higher than the constant set in n26 for the maximum voltage
frequency, use the following formula to obtain the compensation frequency (fc).
fc = output frequency × n109 × [output current – (n032 × n110/100)]/[n31 – (n032 × n110/100)]
n014: Maximum voltage frequency (Hz)
n032: Motor rated current (A)
• Slip compensation primary delay time is set in s units.
Usually setting is not necessary. Adjust when slip compensation responsiveness is low, or speed
has not stabilized.
S When responsiveness is low, decrease the set value.
S When speed has not stabilized, increase the set value.

Note 1. The slip compensation function does not work if the output frequency is lower than the
constant set in n017 for the minimum output frequency.
Note 2. The slip compensation function does not work if the Inverter is in regenerative operation.
Note 3. The slip compensation function does not work if 0.0 is set for the Motor Rated Current.

3-90
Preparing for Operation Chapter 3
Note 4. If n109 is set to 0.0, the slip compensation function will be disabled.
Note 5. Set the motor’s rated frequency in n014.

n112 Operation Selection at Digital Operator interruption


Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0

Set Values
Set value Description
0 Digital Operator disconnection detection disabled
1 Digital Operator disconnection detection enabled

• This function can be used to detect a disconnection with the Digital Operator.
• When n112 is set to 1, if a disconnection with the Digital Operator is detected while the Inverter is run-
ning, an %pr error will be displayed and the motor will coast to a stop.

n113 Frequency detection width


Setting range 0.0 to 25.5 Unit Hz Default setting 2.0

• Set the detection widths for frequency agreement (set value: 2), optional frequency agreement (set
value: 3), and optional frequency detection (set values: 4, 5) for multi-function inputs 1 to 5 (n035 to
n039).
Frequency agreement, optional frequency agreement: Detection width = Value set for n113
Release width = Twice value set for n113
Optional frequency detection: Release width = Value set for n113

n114 Operation Selection at Operation Mode Switching


(local/remote switching)
Setting range 0, 1 Unit --- Default setting 0

Set Values
Set value Description
0 Run signals that are input during mode switching are ignored. (Input run signals after switching
the mode.)
1 Run signals become effective immediately after switching to the Remote mode. (Operation after
the mode has switched will be determined by the status of the run signal at that time.)

• Select whether or not to ignore run signals input while the operation mode is switched using the Operation Mode
Selection Key on the Digital Operator or with operation mode selection input from the multi-function inputs.

Note If n114 is set to 1, when the operation mode changes the Inverter may start running immediately. Take steps
to ensure safety for such operation.

3-91
4Chapter 4

Operation
4-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions
4-2 Troubleshooting
4-3 Maintenance and Inspection
Operation Chapter 4

4-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

H Errors Interrupting Inverter Output


• If the Inverter detects an error, the Inverter will have an error contact output and decelerate the motor
to a stop, make the motor coast to a stop, or let the motor continue rotating according to the error pro-
cessing mode selected while the Digital Operator displays the status of the error.
• If an error results, refer to the following and take the necessary action.
• Before restarting the Inverter, take one of the following actions to reset the Inverter. If the run signal is
ON, turn it OFF. The reset signal will be ignored if the run signal is ON.
Turn ON an error reset signal by setting the multi-function input parameter used by the Inverter to 4.
Press the STOP/RESET Key.
Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and ON.

D Errors and Actions Taken


Data Description Cause and action
display
%c Overcurrent (OC) The output side of the Inverter is shorted or grounded due to
The Inverter output current motor coil burnout, poor motor coil insulation, or cable damage.
instantaneously exceeded the The load is excessive. The acceleration and deceleration time
overcurrent detection level. settings are too short.
A special motor or a motor with a capacity exceeding the
maximum output capacity of the Inverter is used.
The magnetic contactor on the output side of the Inverter was
opened and closed.
→ Determine the cause of the error, take the necessary action,
and reset the system.
gf Ground fault (GF) The output side of the Inverter is grounded due to the motor coil
A ground fault current burnout, poor motor coil insulation, or cable damage.
exceeding 50% of the rated → Determine the cause of the error, take the necessary action,
Inverter output current flowed and reset the system.
from the output side of the
Inverter.
puf Fuse pre-arcing (PUF) The output transistor is broken, in which case replace the
The fuse of the main circuit Inverter. The output transistor will break if the B1 or negative
blew out. terminal is shorted with the T1 (U), T2 (V), or T3 (W) terminal.
The output side of the Inverter is shorted or grounded.
→ Determine the cause of the error, take the necessary action,
and reset the system.
sc Load short-circuit (SC) The output side of the Inverter is shorted or grounded due to
The Inverter output or load is motor coil burnout, poor motor coil insulation, or cable damage.
shorted. → Determine the cause of the error, take the necessary action,
and reset the system.

4-2
Operation Chapter 4

Data Description Cause and action


display
%U Main circuit overvoltage The deceleration time setting is too short and regenerative
(OV) energy from the motor is excessive.
The DC voltage of the main → Increase the deceleration time or connect the Braking Resistor
circuit exceeded the Unit.
overvoltage detection level A surge is imposed when the phase advance capacitor is
(approx. 400 V for 200-V class switched.
models and approx. 800 V for
400-V class models). → Insert an AC reactor into the power input side of the Inverter.
The voltage of power supply to the Inverter is too high.
→ Lower the voltage within the rated power supply voltage.
uU1 Main circuit undervoltage Power supply to the Inverter has phase loss.
(UV1) An instantaneous power interruption occurred.
The DC voltage of the main Power input terminal screws are loose.
circuit dropped to or below the
undervoltage detection level The voltage fluctuation of power supply to the Inverter is
(approx. 190 V for 200-V class excessive.
models and approx. 380 V for → Determine the cause of the error, take the necessary action,
400-V class models). and reset the system.
uU2 Control power supply fault → Turn power supply to the Inverter OFF and ON.
(UV2) → If this problem persists, replace the Inverter.
A voltage fault occurred in
control output power supply.
uU3 Inrush current preventive → Turn power supply to the Inverter OFF and ON.
circuit fault (UV3) → If this problem persists, replace the Inverter.
The inrush current preventive
circuit is malfunctioning.
Short-phase input (SPI) Power supply to the Inverter has phase loss.
The DC voltage of the main An instantaneous power interruption occurred.
circuit fluctuates excessively Power input terminal screws are loose.
while the Inverter is not
affected by regenerative The voltage fluctuation of power supply to the Inverter is
energy. (The input phase loss excessive.
detection level and time are The voltages of the phases of power supply to the Inverter are
set with n080 and n081.) uneven.
→ Determine the cause of the error, take the necessary action,
and reset the system.
sp% Short-phase output (SPO) The output cable is broken.
The Inverter output has phase A motor coil is broken.
loss. (The output phase loss Motor output terminal screws are loose.
detection level and time are
set with n082 and n083.) → Determine the cause of the error, take the necessary action,
and reset the system.
%h1* Heat sink overheat (OH1) The ambient temperature is too high.
The temperature of the heat → Install a cooling fan or air conditioner.
sink exceeded approx. 90°C. A heat generating object exists near the Inverter.
→ Remove the object.
%h2 Heat sink overheat (OH2) The cooling fan of the Inverter is not operating.
The temperature of the heat → The cooling fan must be replaced, in which case contact your
sink exceeded approx. 100°C. OMRON representative.
High carrier frequency. (400V-class models)
→ Decrease the set value of n050.

4-3
Operation Chapter 4

Data Description Cause and action


display
rh Braking resistor overheat Regenerative energy from the motor is excessive.
(RH) → Increase the deceleration time, connect a small load, or
The braking resistor protection connect the Braking Resistor Unit to the Inverter.
function set with n079 worked. The voltage of power supply to the Inverter is too high.
→ Lower the voltage within the rated power supply voltage.
rr Control transistor overheat Regenerative energy from the motor is excessive.
(RR) → Increase the deceleration time, connect a small load, or use
The control transistor replace the Inverter with a model that has a capacity one rank
protection function worked. or two ranks higher.
The voltage of power supply to the Inverter is too high. Lower the
voltage within the rated power supply voltage.
%l1 Motor overload (OL1) The load is excessive or the acceleration time, deceleration time,
The electronic thermal relay and cycle time are too short.
actuated the motor overload → Review the load size, acceleration time, deceleration time,
protection function. and cycle time.
The voltage of the V/f characteristics is excessive.
→ Review the V/f characteristics.
The rated input current of the motor set with n032 is improper.
→ Set n032 properly.
%l2 Inverter overload (OL2) The load size is excessive or the acceleration time, deceleration
The electronic thermal relay time, and cycle time are too short.
actuated the Inverter overload → Review the load size, acceleration time, deceleration time,
protection function. and cycle time.
The voltage of the V/f characteristics is excessive.
→ Review the V/f characteristics.
The capacity of the Inverter is too small.
→ Replace the Inverter with a model that has a larger capacity.
High carrier frequency. (400V-class models)
→ Decrease the set value of n050.
%l3* Overtorque (OL3) → Check whether the n075 and n076 settings are appropriate.
A current exceeding the value → Check the machine use status and eliminate the cause of the
set with n075 flowed for more problem.
than the time set with n076.
ef2 External error (Terminal S2) An external error is input.
ef3 External error (Terminal S3) → Remove the cause of the external error.
ef4 External error (Terminal S4)
ef5 External error (Terminal S5)
ef6 External error (Terminal S6)

4-4
Operation Chapter 4

Data Description Cause and action


display
%pr Digital Operator connection The connecting cable is broken.
error There is a fault in one of the connectors on the Inverter or the
The Digital Operator became Digital Operator.
disconnected while the → Re-insert or clean the connectors before turning ON the power
Inverter was running. Detected supply again.
when n112 = 1.
Parameter incorrectly set.
→ Set n112 to 0.
If this problem persists, replace the cable or the Inverter.
cpf0 Digital Operator The Digital Operator is not connected to the Inverter properly.
transmission error (CPF0) → Reconnect the Digital Operator to the Inverter.
The Inverter could not The CPU of the Inverter is broken.
communicate with the Digital
Operator within 5 s after → Replace the Inverter.
power is supplied to the
Inverter.
cpf1 Digital Operator The Digital Operator is not connected to the Inverter properly.
transmission error (CPF1) → Reconnect the Digital Operator to the Inverter.
A transmission error lasting The CPU of the Inverter is broken.
longer than 2 s occurred after
transmission with the Digital → Replace the Inverter.
Operator started.
cpf4 EEPROM fault (CPF4) → Turn power supply to the Inverter OFF and ON.
→ If this problem persists, replace the Inverter.
cpf5 A/D converter fault (OPF5) → Turn power supply to the Inverter OFF and ON.
→ If this problem persists, replace the Inverter.

Note Stopping methods can be selected for the errors with asterisk marks.

H Warnings
• When a warning status arises, the Inverter will not generate an error contact output. Eliminating the
cause will recover the system automatically.
• If a warning status arises, refer to the following and take the necessary action.

D Warnings and Actions Taken


Data Description Cause and action
display
ef Forward and reverse → Review the sequence used for the forward and reverse
flashing rotation commands input rotation commands.
simultaneously
The forward and reverse
rotation commands were input
simultaneously for 0.5 s or
more.

4-5
Operation Chapter 4

Data Description Cause and action


display
uU Main circuit undervoltage → Check whether the voltage of power supply to the Inverter is
flashing (UV) proper. If not, impose the proper voltage.
The DC voltage of the main → Check whether the power input line to the Inverter is broken or
circuit dropped to or below the disconnected. If the power input line is broken or
undervoltage detection level. disconnected, replace the power input line or connect the
power input line properly.
→ Check the terminal block screws for looseness. If they are
loose, tighten them securely.
%U Main circuit overvoltage → Check whether the voltage of power supply to the Inverter is
flashing (OV) proper. If not, impose proper voltage.
The DC voltage of the main
circuit exceeded the
overvoltage detection level
while the Inverter had no
output.
%h1 Heat sink overheat (OH1) The ambient temperature is too high.
flashing The temperature of the heat → Install a cooling fan or air conditioner.
sink exceeded approximately A heat generating object exists near the Inverter.
90°C and n034 was set to 3
for the continuous operation of → Remove the object.
the Inverter.
%h3 Inverter overheat warning → Turn OFF inverter overheat warning.
flashing (OH3)
Inverter overheat warning as
multi-function input was
received by the Inverter.
%l3 Overtorque (OL3) → Check whether the n075 and n076 settings are appropriate.
flashing A current exceeding the value → Check the machine use status and eliminate the cause of the
set with n075 flowed for more problem.
than the time set with n076.
bb Remote baseblock (bb) → Turn OFF the remote baseblock command input.
flashing The remote baseblock
command input as
multi-function input was
received by the Inverter.
call Operation mode error The parameter n002 was set to a value other than 0 to 3.
flashing (CALL) → Reset n002.
The setting of n002 was
improper.
%pe3 Multi-function input setting Make sure that the values of n035 to n039 are different from one
error another.
The multi-function input Make sure that a single search mode is selected with n035 to
settings of n035 to n039 were n039 set to 15 or 16.
improper. Make sure that both set values 22 and 25 are selected with n035
to n039.
%pe5 V/f data setting error Reset the optional V/f pattern to satisfy the following condition.
Optional V/f pattern settings → n017 x n015 x n014 x n012
were improper.

4-6
Operation Chapter 4

Data Description Cause and action


display
%pe6 Parameter setting error Check whether the rated input current of the motor set with n032
Parameter settings other than satisfies the following condition. If not, check the rated current of
the ones used for the motor and reset n032.
multi-function input and V/f → Rated input current of Inverter x 0.1 x n032 x rated input
pattern settings were current of Inverter x 2
improper. Jumping frequency 1 set with n058 is higher than jumping
frequency 2 set with n059. Reset jumping frequencies 1 and 2 to
satisfy the following condition.
→ n058 x n059
The upper limit of the output frequency set with n030 is lower
than the lower limit of the output frequency set with n031. Reset
the upper and lower limits of the output frequency to satisfy the
following condition.
→ n030 y n031

4-7
Operation Chapter 4

4-2 Troubleshooting

If the Inverter or motor does not operate properly when the system is started, parameter
settings or wiring may be incorrect. In this case, take the appropriate action as described
below. If an error code is displayed, refer to 4-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions.

H Parameters Fail to Set

D Display Does Not Change when Increment or Decrement Key is Pressed


n001 (parameter write-inhibit selection) is set to write-inhibit.
It is possible to designate the parameters to be set with n001.
All parameters can be written if n001 is set to 3.

D OPE3, OPE5, or OPE6 is Displayed


Parameter settings are improper.
Refer to page 4-5, Warnings and set the parameters properly.

D CPF0 or CPF5 is Displayed


The Inverter is not properly communicating with the Digital Operator.
The Digital Operator is not properly connected to the Inverter. Reconnect the Digital Operator to the
Inverter.

H Motor Fails to Operate

D Motor Does Not Operate when RUN Key is Pressed


• The operation mode is improper.
The motor will not operate when the RUN Key on the Digital Operator is pressed if n002 is set to 1 or 3.
Press the Operation Mode Selection Key to enable the Digital Operator or set n002 to 0 or 2.

Note The Operation Mode Selection Key can be enabled or disabled with n007.
• Any of the bottom two lines of the monitor item indicators is lit.
The Inverter does not start while any indicator on the bottom two lines is lit.
To start the Inverter, press the Mode Key to light an indicator on the top two lines and press the RUN
Key.
• The reference frequency is too low.
When the reference frequency is less than the minimum output frequency set with n017, the Inverter
cannot operate. Change the reference frequency to the minimum output frequency or more.
• The emergency stop signal is input to the Inverter.
The motor does not operate if the emergency stop signal is input to the Inverter.
Turn OFF the emergency stop signal and press the RUN Key.

4-8
Operation Chapter 4
D Motor Does Not Operate when Run Command is Input
• The operation mode is improper.
The motor will not operate when the run command is input to the Inverter if n002 is set to 0 or 2 or the
Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator. Set n002 to 1 or 3 or press the Operation Mode Selection
Key to enable the Inverter to operate with control input.
• The Inverter is in 3-wire sequential operation.
Even if the Inverter is ready to accept remote run input, the motor will not operate when the forward/
stop or reverse/stop rotation command is input to the Inverter in 3-wire sequential operation because
the meanings of the run signals input to the Inverter in 2-wire sequential operation are different from
the meanings of the run signals input to the Inverter in 3-wire sequential operation.
Set with n035 multi-function input selection 1 to 0 when the Inverter is in 2-wire sequential operation.
• Any of the bottom two lines of the monitor item indicators is lit.
The Inverter does not start while any indicator on the bottom two lines is lit.
To start the Inverter, press the Mode Key to light an indicator on the top two lines and input the run
command.
• The reference frequency is too low.
When the reference frequency is less than the minimum output frequency set with n017, the Inverter
cannot operate. Change the reference frequency to the minimum output frequency or more.
• The emergency stop signal is input to the Inverter.
The motor does not operate if the emergency stop signal is input to the Inverter.
Turn OFF the emergency stop signal and input the run command.

D Motor Stops During Acceleration or When Load is Connected


The load is excessive.
The Inverter has a stall preventive function and full automatic torque boost function. If the acceleration
of the motor is too high or the load excessive, however, the motor response limit will be exceeded.
To prevent this, increase the acceleration time, reduce the load, or increase the motor capacity.

D Motor Accelerated and Rotating Stalls to Stop When Motor Rotation Speed
Reaches a Certain Level
The energy-saving control settings of the Inverter are improper.
The output voltage is too small because the lower output voltage limits set with n097 and n098 are too
small.
Set the lower output voltage limits at 60 Hz and 6 Hz with n097 and n098 to larger values so that the
motor will not stall to a stop.

D Motor Rotation Direction Cannot Be Changed


The reverse rotation of the motor is inhibited.
The Inverter will not accept the reverse rotation command in n006 because reverse rotation inhibit
selection is set to 1. Set n006 to 0.

H Motor Rotates in Wrong Direction


The motor output line is connected incorrectly.
If terminals T1 (U), T2 (V), and T3 (W) of the Inverter are correctly connected to terminals T1 (U), T2 (V),
and T3 (W) of the motor, the motor rotates in the forward direction when the forward rotation command
is input. Since the forward direction of rotation depends on the motor manufacturer and model, check
the motor specifications.
To reverse the direction of rotation, switch the wires of two phases of T1 (U), T2 (V), and T3 (W) or set
n005 for motor rotation direction selection to 1.

4-9
Operation Chapter 4

H Motor Deceleration Is Too Slow

D Deceleration Time is Too Long Even if Braking Resistor Unit is Connected


• Stall prevention during deceleration is selected with n070.
When the Braking Resistor Unit is connected, always set n070 to 0 (i.e., no stall prevention during
deceleration). If n070 is set to 1, the Braking Resistor Unit will not be used. The parameter n070 is set
to 1 before shipping.
• The deceleration time set with n020 or n022 is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting.
• The motor torque is insufficient.
If the parameter settings are normal and overvoltage does not occur, the motor capacity is insufficient.
The motor capacity should be increased.

H Vertical-axis Load Drops When Brakes are Applied


• The sequence is incorrect.
The Inverter is default-set to remain in DC braking status for 0.5 s after deceleration is complete.
To make sure that the brake holds, use the frequency detection function and apply the brake only when
the detected frequency drops to 3 to 5 Hz or lower. Also at startup, use the frequency detection func-
tion, and release the brake only when the detected frequency is 3 to 5 Hz or higher.
• The DC control current is insufficient.
If the DC control current is insufficient, set a higher DC control current with n064.
• Inappropriate brakes are used.
The holding brake is designed only for holding, not for braking. If the holding brake is used for braking,
the brake pad will wear out much faster than designed. Use an appropriate brake for braking.

H Motor Burns
• The load is excessive.
The motor will burn out if the load is excessive and the effective torque of the motor exceeds the rated
torque of the motor. The motor may have permissible torque for a limited period, such as an eight-hour
rated torque. The motor will burn out if motor is operated with the eight-hour rated torque continuously
for more than eight hours.
Reduce the load or the acceleration and deceleration time of the motor or increase the motor capacity
if the load is excessive.
• The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor will burn out if the motor is operated with its rated torque continuously if the ambient temper-
ature is higher than the permissible ambient temperature of the motor. Always use the motor within the
permissible ambient temperature.
• The dielectric strength of each phase of the motor is insufficient.
Surge occurs between the switching circuit of the Inverter and the coils of the motor if the output of the
Inverter is connected to the motor. Normally, the maximum surge voltage is approximately three times
the power voltage imposed on the Inverter (i.e., 600 V for the 200-V Inverter and 1,200 V for the 400-V
Inverter). Therefore, the dielectric strength of each phase the motor to be used must be higher than the
maximum surge voltage.
Be sure to connect a dedicated motor to the 400-V Inverter.

4-10
Operation Chapter 4

H Controller Receives Noise When Inverter is Started


Noise derives from Inverter switching.
Take the following actions to prevent noise.
S Reduce the carrier frequency of the Inverter set with n050.
The number of internal switching times is reduced, so noise can be reduced to some extent.
S Install an output noise filter.
Install the 3G3IV-PHF Input Noise Filter on the power input side of the Inverter.
S Install an output noise filter.
Install the 3G3IV-PLF Output Noise Filter on the output side of the Inverter.
S Use a metal box and pipes.
Metal can block off radio waves. Therefore, enclose the Inverter with a metal (steel) box to prevent
radio waves from being emitted from the Inverter.

H Ground Fault Interrupter is Actuated When Inverter is Started.


Leakage current flows through the Inverter.
Because switching is performed inside the Inverter, a leakage current flows through the Inverter. This
leakage current may actuate the ground fault interrupter, shutting the power OFF.
Use a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage-current detection value (sensitivity amperage of
200 mA min., operating time of 0.1 s min.) or one with high-frequency countermeasures for inverters.
Reducing the carrier frequency value set with n050 is also effective.
A leakage current increases in proportion to the cable length. Normally, an approximately leakage cur-
rent of 5 mA is generated per meter (cable length).

H Machine Vibrates

D Mechanical System Makes Noise


The carrier frequency and the natural frequency of the mechanical system are resonating.
If the mechanical system is making high-pitch noise while the motor is operating normally, the carrier
frequency and the natural frequency of the mechanical system are resonating, in which case, change
the carrier frequency with n050 so that the mechanical system will not resonate.

4-11
Operation Chapter 4
D Motor Response Speed Waveform Resonates
• The output frequency of the Inverter and the natural frequency of the mechanical system are resonat-
ing.
Use the frequency jump function with n058 to n060 so that the mechanical system will not resonate or
install the motor on a rubber vibration insulator.
• PID parameters are improper.
Adjust the PID parameters if the response speed waveform of the motor vibrates while the Inverter is
performing PID control. Set n087 to a longer integral time if the cycle of the vibration is long and set
n088 to a shorter derivative time if the cycle of the vibration is short. Refer to page 3-36 for PID adjust-
ments.
• Energy-saving parameters are improper.
If the response speed waveform of the motor vibrates while the Inverter is in energy-saving mode,
measure the cycle of the vibration.
If the cycle of the vibration coincides with the mean power time set with n099, the search operation
function is not working properly. Set the search operation voltage limit with n100 to 0 to invalidate the
search operation mode or set the 100% and 5% search operation voltage steps with n101 and n102 to
smaller values so that the output voltage range of the Inverter performing search operation will be nar-
row.

D Rotating Motor Drops Rotation Speed for an Instant after Rotation Speed of Motor
Is Accelerated.
Energy-saving parameters are improper.
The value of the energy-saving coefficient K2 set with n092 is improper if the motor drops its rotation
speed for an instant after the rotation speed of the motor is accelerated by the Inverter in energy-saving
mode.
Reset K2 to the value for the capacity of a motor one rank lower than the motor in use. Refer to page
3-26.

H Motor Continues to Rotate After Inverter Output is Shut OFF


The DC control current is insufficient to stop the motor.
Take the following actions to adjust the DC control current.
S Set the DC control current with n064 to a higher current.
S Set the DC braking time with n065 to a longer time.

H OV is Detected or Fan Stalls When Operated


The DC control current is insufficient to start the fan.
OV will be detected or the fan will stall if the fan is operated while the fan is rotating.
To prevent this, reduce the rotation speed of the fan with a sufficient DC control current set with n066.

4-12
Operation Chapter 4

H Output Frequency Does Not Reach Reference Frequency


• The reference frequency is within the jumping frequency ranges.
The output frequency will not change within the jumping frequency ranges if the frequency jump func-
tion is used.
Check whether jumping frequency 1 and 2 set with n058 and n059 and the jumping frequency width
set with n060 are proper.
• The reference frequency exceeds the output frequency upper limit.
The output frequency upper limit is obtained from the following.
Maximum frequency (n021) x output frequency upper limit (n 030)/100
Check whether the values set with n012 and n030 are proper.

H Inverter Overload “OL2” is Detected


For a 400-V Inverter, if the carrier frequency “n050” is set to a value higher than the default setting, the
Inverter overload “OL2” detection value will decrease in consideration of an increase in the heat that will
be generated by the change in the carrier frequency. Since the detection value is set to decrease by
approximately 15% for every change to a rank higher than the default setting , the Inverter overload
“OL2” may be detected prior to the motor overload “OL1” depending on the set value. Set the carrier
frequency to a lower level by one rank.

H EF (Forward and Reverse Rotation Commands Input Simultaneously)


is Detected and the Inverter does not Operate

D Incorrect Operation Sequence


If the forward and reverse commands are input simultaneously for more than 0.5 s, an EF error will be
detected. Change the operation sequence.

D Malfunction due to Unwanted Current Path


Inverter inputs may remain ON due to an unwanted current path for the controller outputs. With the wir-
ing shown in the following table, if the controller output power supply is less than 24 V DC or if the power
is OFF, the current indicated by the arrow will flow and the Inverter inputs will operate. If that occurs,
insert a diode as shown in the diagram at point A.

A
Control device Inverter (control input)

S1 to 6

4-13
Operation Chapter 4

4-3 Maintenance and Inspection

D Cautions and Warnings


! WARNING Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied.

! WARNING Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power
supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is turned OFF,
and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock.

! WARNING Maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed by authorized


personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury.

! WARNING Do not attempt to take the Unit apart or repair. Doing either of these may result in
electrical shock or injury.

! Caution Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless
handling may result in malfunction.

! Caution Do not change wiring, disconnect connectors, the Operator, or optional items, or
replace fans while power is being supplied. Doing so may result in injury, damage to
the product, or malfunction.

D Daily Inspection
While the system is operating, check the following items.
S Check the motor for noise.
S Check for error heating.
S Check if the ambient temperature is too high.
S Check if the output current monitor display indicates a higher value than usual.
S Check if the cooling fan mounted to the bottom part of the Inverter is operating normally.

D Regular Maintenance
Check the items below during regular maintenance.
Before starting inspection, always turn the power OFF, then wait at least one minute after all indicators
on the front panel go OFF. Touching a terminal immediately after turning the power OFF may result in an
electric shock.
S Check the terminal block screws for looseness.
S Check if electrically conductive dust or oil mist adheres to the terminal block or interior of the Invert-
er.
S Check the Inverter mounting screws for looseness.

4-14
Operation Chapter 4
S Check if dust or dirt is accumulated on the heat sink.
S Check if dust is accumulated in the air vents.
S Check if the appearance is normal.
S Check if the cooling fan for the control panel operates normally. Check for noise or error vibration,
and also check if the total hours of operation have exceeded the value shown in the parentheses.

D Regular Parts Maintenance


The Inverter consists of many different parts. Full performance is possible only when these parts oper-
ate normally.
Some electronic parts require maintenance depending on the service conditions. To allow the Inverter
to operate normally over an extended period of time, always perform regular inspection and parts re-
placement according to the service life of each part.
Regular inspection intervals vary according to the Inverter installation environment and service condi-
tions.
The maintenance intervals for this Inverter are shown below. Use this information as a guide to regular
maintenance.
The standard intervals for regular maintenance are as follows:
S Cooling fan: 2 to 3 years
S Electrolytic capacitor: 5 years
S Fuse: 10 years
As for service conditions, it is assumed that the ambient temperature of the Inverter is 40°C, and the
Inverter is used at a load factor of 80% for eight hours a day and is installed as specified in the Operation
Manual.
To extend maintenance intervals, ambient temperatures should be lowered and power-ON time should
be minimized.

Note Contact your OMRON representative for the maintenance procedure.

4-15
5
Chapter 5

Specifications
5-1 Specifications of Inverters
5-2 Specifications of Peripheral Devices
Specifications Chapter 5

5-1 Specifications of Inverters

General Specifications for 200-V Inverter


Model 3G3HV- A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 B2185 B2220 B2300 B2370 B2450 B2550 B2750
Maximum applicable motor 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75
capacity (kW)
Output Rated output ca- 6.7 9.5 13 19 24 30 37 50 61 70 85 110
charac- pacity (kVA)
teristics Rated output 17.5 25 33 49 64 80 96 130 160 183 224 300
current (A)
Maximum output 3-phase, 200 to 230 VAC (Corresponds to input voltage.)
voltage (V)
Maximum output 400 Hz (Set by parameter constant.)
frequency (Hz)
Power Rated voltage 3-phase, 200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
supply (V)
charac- Rated frequency
teristics (Hz)
Allowable volt- –15% to 10%
age fluctuation
Allowable fre- ±5%
quency fluctua-
tion
Heat generated (kW) 0.22 0.30 0.35 0.59 0.73 0.89 1.2 1.4 1.8 2.1 2.7 3.3
Weight (kg) Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
4.5 5.5 6.0 11 11 28 28 61 62 80 80 135

Control Characteristics
Model 3G3HV- A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150
B2185 B2220 B2300 B2370 B2450 B2550 B2750
Power supply harmonic DC reactor connection possible. DC reactor built in.
countermeasures 12-pulse rectification input
Control method Sine wave PWM (high-carrier frequency control)
Carrier frequency 2.5 to 15 kHz (Step setting) 2.5 to 10 kHz (Step setting)
Frequency control range 0.1 to 400 Hz
Frequency precision Digital commands: ±0.01% (–10 to 40°C)
(temperature characteris- Analog commands: ±0.1% (25±10°C)
tics)
Frequency setting resolu- Digital commands: 0.1 Hz
tion Analog commands: 0.6 Hz/60 Hz (1/1,000 or equivalent)
Output frequency resolution 0.1 Hz
Overload capacity 150% of rated current for one minute 120% of rated current for one minute
Frequency setting signal 0- to 10-VDC (20 kΩ) voltage input or 4- to 20-mA (250 Ω) current input
Acceleration/Deceleration 0.0 to 3,600 s (acceleration and deceleration set separately)
time
Braking torque Approx. 20% (Up to 125% possible with Approx. 20% (External braking resistor cannot be attached.)
external braking resistor.)
Voltage/frequency charac- Select from 15 types of fixed V/f patterns or set any V/f pattern.
teristics

5-2
Specifications Chapter 5
Protective Functions
Model 3G3HV- A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 B2185 B2220 B2300 B2370 B2450 B2550 B2750
Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal.
Instantaneous overcurrent Stops at approx. 200% of rated output cur- Stops at approx. 180% of rated output current.
protection rent.
Overload protection Stops in one minute at approx. 150% of Stops in one minute at approx. 120% of rated output current.
rated output current.
Overvoltage protection Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 410 V.
Undervoltage protection Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 190 V.
Momentary power interrup- Stops at 15 ms or more. By means of an operating mode selection, operation can be continued if recov-
tion compensation (selec- ery occurs within 2 seconds.
tion)
Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor.
Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits.
Charge indicator (internal Lit when rated DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
LED)

Environment
Model 3G3HV- A2037 A2055 A2075 A2110 A2150 B2185 B2220 B2300 B2370 B2450 B2550 B2750
Location Indoors (no corrosive gas, oil spray, metallic dust, etc.)
Ambient operating tempera- –10 to 45°C (NEMA1 type: –10 to 40°C) –10 to 45°C (Open chassis type)
ture
Ambient operating humidity 90% RH (with no condensation)
Storage temperature –20 to 60°C
Altitude 1,000 m max.
Insulation resistance 5 MΩ min. (Do not carry out the insulation resistance test or withstand voltage test.)
Vibration withstand Vibration frequency less than 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s2, 1G max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s2, 0.2G max
Protective structure Both enclosed NEMA1 type and panel Open chassis type: IP00
open chassis type: IP10

General Specifications for 400-V Inverter


Model 3G3HV- A4037 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 B4185 B4220 B4300 B4370 B4450 B4550 B4750 B411K B416K B418K B422K B430K
Maximum applicable 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 110 160 185 220 300
motor capacity (kW)
Output Rated output 6.1 11 14 21 26 31 40 50 61 73 98 130 170 230 260 340 460
char- capacity
acter- (kVA)
istics Rated output 8 14 18 27 34 41 52 65 80 96 128 165 224 302 340 450 605
current (A)
Maximum 3-phase, 380 to 460 VAC (Corresponds to input voltage.)
output volt-
age (V)
Maximum 400 Hz (Set by parameter constant.)
output fre-
quency (Hz)
Power Rated volt- 3-phase, 380 to 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz
supply age (V)
char- Rated fre-
acter- quency (Hz)
istics Allowable –15 to 10%
voltage fluc-
tuation
Allowable fre- ±5%
quency fluc-
tuation
Heat generated (kW) 0.15 0.22 0.36 0.46 0.57 0.66 0.88 1.1 1.3 1.4 1.9 2.4 3.1 4.2 5.0 6.9 9.8
Weight (kg) Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx. Approx.
4.5 6.0 6.0 11 11 27 27 44 44 44 79 80 135 145 360 360 420

5-3
Specifications Chapter 5
Control Characteristics
Model 3G3HV- A4037 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 B4185 B4220 B4300 B4370 B4450 B4550 B4750 B411K B416K B418K B422K B430K
Power supply harmon- DC reactor connection pos- DC reactor built-in No item
ic countermeasures sible. 12-pulse rectification input
Control method Sine wave PWM (high-carrier frequency control)
Carrier frequency 2.5 to 15 kHz (Step setting) 2.5 to 10 kHz (Step setting) 2.5 kHz max.
Frequency control 0.1 to 400 Hz
range
Frequency precision Digital commands: ±0.01% (–10 to 40°C)
(temperature charac- Analog commands: ±0.1% (25±10°C)
teristics)
Frequency setting res- Digital commands: 0.1 Hz
olution Analog commands: 0.6 Hz/60 Hz (1/1,000 or equivalent)
Output frequency reso- 0.1 Hz
lution
Overload capacity 150% of rated current for one minute 120% of rated current for one minute
Frequency setting sig- 0- to 10-VDC (20 kΩ) voltage input or 4- to 20-mA (250 Ω) current input
nal
Acceleration/Decelera- 0.0 to 3,600 s (acceleration and deceleration set separately)
tion time
Braking torque Approx. 20% (Up to 125% Approx. 20% (External braking resistor cannot be at- Approx. 20% (Up
possible with external braking tached.) to 100% possible
resistor.) with external
braking resistor.)
Voltage/frequency Select from 15 types of fixed V/f patterns or set any V/f pattern.
characteristics

Protective Functions
Model 3G3HV- A4037 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 B4185 B4220 B4300 B4370 B4450 B4550 B4750 B411K B416K B418K B422K B430K
Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal.
Instantaneous overcur- Stops at approx. 200% of Stops at approx. 180% of rated output current.
rent protection rated output current.
Overload protection Stops in one minute at Stops in one minute at approx. 120% of rated output current.
approx. 150% of rated output
current.
Overvoltage protection Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 820 V.
Undervoltage protec- Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approx. 380 V.
tion
Momentary power in- Stops at 15 ms or more. By means of an operating mode selection, operation can be continued if recovery
terruption compensa- occurs within 2 seconds.
tion (selection)
Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor.
Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits.
Charge indicator (inter- Lit when rated DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
nal LED)

Environment
Model 3G3HV- A4037 A4055 A4075 A4110 A4150 B4185 B4220 B4300 B4370 B4450 B4550 B4750 B411K B416K B418K B422K B430K
Location Indoors (no corrosive gas, oil spray, metallic dust, etc.)
Ambient operating –10 to 45°C (NEMA1 type: –10 to 45°C (Open chassis type)
temperature –10 to 40°C)
Ambient operating hu- 90% RH (with no condensation)
midity
Storage temperature –20 to 60°C
Altitude 1,000 m max.
Insulation resistance 5 MΩ min. (Do not carry out the insulation resistance test or withstand voltage test.)
Vibration withstand Vibration frequency less than 20 Hz, 9.8 m/s2, 1G max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 2 m/s2, 0.2G max
Protective structure Both enclosed NEMA1 type Open chassis type: IP00
and panel open chassis type:
IP10

5-4
Specifications Chapter 5

5-2 Specifications of Peripheral Devices

5-2-1 Peripheral Devices


Independent Peripheral Devices Dedicated Peripheral Devices

K3TJ-V11j 3G3IV-PJVOP95j
Scaling Meter 3G3IV-PJVOP96j Ana- 3G3IV- 3G3IV-PLKEBj 3G3HV-
Analog Operator
log Operator (Standard (Miniature Model PCDBRj Braking Resistor PUZDABj
Model with Steel Casing) with Plastic Casing) Braking Unit Unit DC Reactor

Extension Cable for Digital Operator


Option Card

3G3FV-PCN125 (1 m)
3G3HV-PCMA2
Voltage/Current Conversion Card 3G3FV-PCN325 (3 m)

3G3HV Inverter

Independent Peripheral Devices Independent Peripheral Devices


(Recommended) (Recommended)

3G3IV-PUZBABj 3G3IV-PLFj
AC Reactor 3G3EV-PLNFDj
Simple Input Noise 3G3IV-PFNj Output Noise
Filter Input Noise Filter Filter

Power Supply Three-phase


3-phase, 200 VAC for 200-V class induction motor
3-phase, 400 VAC for 400-V class

5-5
Specifications Chapter 5

5-2-2 3G3HV-PCMA2 Voltage/Current Conversion Card


The 3G3HV-PCMA2 is a dedicated optional device mounted to the control circuit board of the 3G3HV-
series Inverter to convert the 0- to 10-VDC multi-function analog outputs of the Inverter to 4- to 20-mA
outputs.

D Standard Models
Model Specification
3G3HV-PCMA2 Dedicated device for the 3G3HV-series Inverter to convert the 0- to 10-VDC
outputs of the Inverter to 4- to 20-mA outputs.
D Wiring Example
Three-phase,
200 (400) VAC

Measuring
Voltage/Current Conversion Card instrument

250 Ω

D Mounting Method
Front View Side View

3G3HV-PCMA2 Supporting
Voltage/Current bracket
Conversion
Card

2CN (Connector
for 3G3HV-
PCMA2)

Control circuit
board AM (Multi-func-
tion analog 3G3HV-PCMA2
output)
Ground terminal
for shielded wire

Control circuit terminals

5-6
Specifications Chapter 5

5-2-3 K3TJ-V11j Scaling Meter


Connect the multi-function analog output of the Inverter to the Scaling Meter so that the number of rota-
tions of the motor and the speed of the mechanical system can be monitored in actual units.

D Models
Model Control power supply Display
K3TJ-V111R 100 to 200 VAC Red indicators
K3TJ-V111G Green indicators
K3TJ-V116R 24 VDC with insulation Red indicators
K3TJ-V116G (see note) Green indicators

Note The power supply circuit and input circuit are insulated from each other.

D Standard Specifications
Sampling cycle 2 times/s
Display refresh cycle 2 times/s
Measured value averaging method Simple/Moving average
No. of averaging times 1, 2, 4, or 8 times
Maximum no. of display digits 4 (–1999 to 9999)
Display 14.2-mm-high 7-segment LEDs
Decimal point display Function selector or Up and Down Keys
Scaling method Function selector or Up and Down Keys
Scaling range –1999 to 9999
Zero limit range 0 to 99 digits
Over range Flashing
Zero suppress Possible
External control PV hold (with rear terminals shorted)
Enclosure ratings (conforming to IEC) Front panel: IP51 (see note)
Casing: IP20
Terminals: IP00
Memory protection Non-volatile memory

Note IP51 is ensured if the K32-L49SC Drip-proof Cover is attached to the front panel, otherwise IP50
is ensured.

5-7
Specifications Chapter 5
D Wiring Example
Power distribution
panel
Internal circuit
Power supply
three-phase

Analog
monitor Analog output
0 to +10 VDC

D External Dimensions

75 min.

120 min.
Recommended mounting
dimensions
14.2 mm

7.8 mm
Weight: 200 g Display LED size

5-2-4 3G3IV-PJVOP96j Analog Operator (Standard Model with


Steel Casing)
The 3G3IV-PJVOP96j Analog Operator makes it possible to control the operation of the Inverter, in-
cluding the output frequency, with analog commands at a maximum distance of 50 m.

Frequency meter
Frequency meter
adjustor Frequency reference
Frequency selector selector
Power indicator
Operation indicator Error reset
Error indicator Forward/Stop/Reverse
Front panel selector
Casing

D Standard Models
Model Frequency meter specification
3G3IV-PJVOP961 DCF-6A: 75 Hz, 1 mA, 3 V
3G3IV-PJVOP962 DCF-6A: 150 Hz, 1 mA, 3 V
3G3IV-PJVOP963 DCF-6A: 220 Hz, 1 mA, 3 V

5-8
Specifications Chapter 5
D External Dimensions
Space for
front panel

Panel
mounting

Four, 7 dia.
mounting Two, 4 dia.
hole mounting tap
Two, 23 dia.
Rubber bushing

Weight: 1.8 k g Mounting dimensions

5-2-5 3G3IV-PJVOP95j Analog Operator (Miniature Model with


Plastic Casing)
The 3G3IV-PJVOP95j Analog Operator makes it possible to control the operation of the Inverter, in-
cluding the output frequency, with analog commands at a maximum distance of 50 m.

Frequency meter Frequency selector


Frequency meter adjustor Frequency reference selector
Power indicator Forward/Stop/Reverse selector
Operation indicator Error reset
Error indicator

D Standard Models
Model Frequency meter specification
3G3IV-PJVOP951 TRM-45: 3 V, 1 mA, 60/120 Hz
3G3IV-PJVOP952 TRM-45: 3 V, 1 mA, 90/180 Hz

D External Dimensions

Space for
front panel
Panel
mounting

Three, 3 dia. tap

Weight: 0.8 kg Mounting dimensions

5-9
Specifications Chapter 5

5-2-6 3G3IV-PCDBRjB Braking Unit (Yaskawa Electric)


Connect the 3G3IV-PCDBRjB Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit to the Inverter to reduce the time
required to decelerate the motor.
It is not necessary to connect the 3G3IV-PCDBRj Braking Unit to any 200-V Inverter that has an output
of 7.5 W or less or 400-V Inverter that has an output of 15 kW or less.

D Standard Models
Inverter Braking Unit
Voltage class Maximum motor capacity (kW) Model No. of Units
200-V class 11 3G3IV-PCDBR2015B 1
15 3G3IV-PCDBR2015B 1
400-V class 185 3G3IV-PCDBR4045B 4
220 3G3IV-PCDBR4045B 5
300 3G3IV-PCDBR4045B 6

D External Dimensions
100 min.

Four, M4 mounting holes


100 min.

30 min 30 min

Three lead wire inlets


(22 dia. rubber bushing)

5-2-7 3G3IV-PLKEBj Braking Resistor Unit


The 3G3IV-PLKEBj Braking Resistor Unit consumes the regenerative energy of the motor and re-
duces the deceleration time required by the motor.

5-10
Specifications Chapter 5
Note In the following table, “10% ED” indicates that 10% of the time required for one cycle can be used
for braking (deceleration).

D Standard Models
Inverter Braking Resistor Unit Approximate Minimum
Volt- Maxi- Model Resistor speci- Units braking connection
age mum 3G3IV- fication (per torque (10% resistance
No. of Maximum ED) (Ω)
class motor PLKEBj Unit) Units number of
capacity Units con-
(kW) nected (see
note)
200-V 3.7 23P7 390 W, 40 Ω 1 2 125 9.6
class 5.5 25P5 520 W, 30 Ω 1 3 115 9.6
7.5 27P5 780 W, 20 Ω 1 2 125 9.6
11 2011 2,400 W, 13.6 Ω 1 1 125 9.6
15 2015 3,000 W, 10 Ω 1 1 125 9.6
400-V 3.7 43P7 390 W, 150 Ω 1 4 135 32
class 5.5 45P5 520 W, 100 Ω 1 3 135 32
7.5 47P5 780 W, 75 Ω 1 2 130 32
11 4011 1,400 W, 50 Ω 1 2 135 20
15 4015 1,560 W, 40 Ω 1 2 125 20
185 4045 9,600 W 13.6 Ω 4 1 120 3.2
220 4045 9,600 W 13.6 Ω 5 1 125 3.2
300 4045 9,600 W 13.6 Ω 6 1 110 3.2

Note 1. The maximum numbers of Braking Resistor Units connecting to a single Inverter or Braking
Unit are indicated.
Note 2. Do not use a resistance less than the minimum connection resistance shown in the table.
Doing so may result in damage to the Inverter or the Braking Resistor Unit. (The values for
minimum connection resistance given in the above table are for one Inverter or one Braking
Resistor Unit.)

5-11
Specifications Chapter 5
D External Dimensions
Voltage 3G3IV-PLKEBj Appear- Dimensions Weight (kg)
class Braking Resistor ance A B C D Mounting
Unit screw
200-V class 23P7 1 130 350 75 335 M5 x 4 5.0
25P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 x 4 7.5
27P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 x 4 8.5
2011 2 266 543 246 340 M8 x 4 10
2015 2 356 543 336 340 M8 x 4 15
400-V class 43P7 1 130 350 75 335 M5 x 4 5.0
45P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 x 4 7.5
47P5 1 250 350 200 335 M6 x 4 8.5
4011 2 350 412 330 325 M6 x 4 16
4015 2 350 412 330 325 M6 x 4 18
4045 2 446 956 426 740 M8 x 4 33

Appearance 1

Mounting screw

150 min.
150 min.

30 min. 30 min.

Appearance 2
200 min.

Mounting screw
200 min.

30 min. 30 min.

5-2-8 3G3HV-PUZDABjAjMH DC Reactor


The DC Reactor suppresses the harmonics in the output current of the Inverter.
The DC Reactor suppresses harmonics better than the AC Reactor. The DC Reactor can also be used
with the AC Reactor to suppress harmonics more effectively.

5-12
Specifications Chapter 5
Use the DC Reactor with the Inverter with an output of 15 kW max. The Inverter with an output of
18.5 kW or more has a built-in DC Reactor.

D Standard Models
Inverter DC Reactor
Voltage Maximum Model Rated volt- Rated cur- Inductance Loss (W)
class motor ca- 3G3HV-PUZ- age (V) rent (A) (mH)
pacity (kW) DABj
200-V class 3.7 18A3MH 800 VDC 18 3 18
5.5/7.5 36A1MH 36 1 22
11/15 72A0.5MH 72 0.5 29
400-V class 3.7 12A6.3MH 12 6.3 16
5.5/7.5 23A3.6MH 23 3.6 27
11/15 33A1.9MH 33 1.9 26

D External Dimensions
Model 3G3HV- Dimensions Weight
H W W1 D D1 D2 t d1 d2 (kg)
PUZDAB18A3MH 76 86 60 72 55 80 1.2 M4 M5 2.0
PUZDAB36A1MH 93 105 64 92 80 90 1.6 M6 M6 3.2
PUZDAB72A0.5MH 93 105 64 112 100 105 1.6 M6 M8 4.9
PUZDAB12A6.3MH 76 86 60 72 55 80 1.2 M4 M5 2.0
PUZDAB23A3.6MH 93 105 64 92 80 90 1.6 M6 M5 3.2
PUZDAB33A1.9MH 93 105 64 102 90 95 1.6 M6 M6 4.0

Appearance

Two, 2 dia. screws

Four, 1 dia.
mounting
screws

5-13
Specifications Chapter 5

5-2-9 3G3IV-PUZBABjAjMH AC Reactor


Connect the 3G3IV-PUZBABjAjMH AC Reactor to the power input side of the Inverter to improve the
input power factor of the power supply connected to the Inverter or if the power supply capacity is much
larger than the Inverter capacity.
Select the AC Reactor model according to the motor capacity from the following tables.

D Connection Example
Power
distribution AC Reactor
panel
Motor

D Applicable Range
Power supply

AC Reactor
required.
capacity

AC Reactor not
required.

Inverter capacity (kVA)

5-14
Specifications Chapter 5
D Standard Specifications and External Dimensions

200-V Class
Maximum Model 3G3IV- Amperage Inductance Loss (W) Weight (kg) Appearance
motor ca- PUZBABj (A) (mH)
pacity (kW)
3.7 20 A, 0.53 MH 20 0.53 35 3 2
5.5 30 A, 0.35 MH 30 0.35 45 3
7.5 40 A, 0.265 MH 40 0.265 50 4
11 60 A, 0.18 MH 60 0.18 65 6
15 80 A, 0.13 MH 80 0.13 75 8
18.5 90 A, 0.12 MH 90 0.12 90 8
22 120 A, 0.09 MH 120 0.09 90 8
30 160 A, 0.07 MH 160 0.07 100 12
37 200 A, 0.05 MH 200 0.05 110 15
45 240 A, 240 0.044 125 23
0.044 MH
55 280 A, 280 0.038 130 23
0.038 MH

Dimensions
A B B1 C D E F H J K L M
130 88 114 105 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M5
130 88 119 105 50 70 130 22 M6 9 7 M5
130 98 139 105 50 75 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M6
160 105 147.5 130 75 85 160 25 M6 10 7 M6
180 100 155 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M8
180 100 150 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M8
180 100 155 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M10
210 100 170 175 75 80 205 25 M6 10 7 M10
210 115 182.8 175 75 95 205 25 M6 10 7 M10
240 126 218 215±5 150 110 240 25 M6 8 7 M10
240 126 218 215±5 150 110 240 25 M8 8 10 M12

5-15
Specifications Chapter 5
400-V Class
Maximum Model 3G3IV- Amperage Inductance Loss (W) Weight (kg) Appearance
motor ca- PUZBABj (A) (mH)
pacity (kW)
3.7 10 A, 2.2 MH 10 2.2 43 3 1
5.5 15 A, 1.42 MH 15 1.42 50 4
7.5 20 A, 1.06 MH 20 1.06 50 5 2
11 30 A, 0.7 MH 30 0.7 65 6
15 40 A, 0.53 MH 40 0.53 90 8
18.5 50 A, 0.42 MH 50 0.42 90 8
22 60 A, 0.36 MH 60 0.36 90 8.5
30 80 A, 0.26 MH 80 0.26 95 12
37 90 A, 0.24 MH 90 0.24 110 15
45 120 A, 0.18 MH 120 0.18 130 23
55 150 A, 0.15 MH 150 0.15 150 23

Dimensions
A B B1 C D E F H J K L M
130 88 --- 130 50 65 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4
130 98 --- 130 50 75 130 22 M6 11.5 7 M4
160 90 115 130 75 70 160 25 M6 10 7 M5
160 105 132.5 130 75 85 160 25 M6 10 7 M5
180 100 140 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M6
180 100 145 150 75 80 180 25 M6 10 7 M6
180 100 150 150 75 75 180 25 M6 10 7 M6
210 100 150 175 75 80 205 25 M6 10 7 M8
210 115 177.5 175 75 95 205 25 M6 10 7 M8
240 126 193 205±5 150 110 240 25 M8 8 10 M10
240 126 198 205±5 150 110 240 25 M8 8 10 M10

Appearance 1

M: Terminal

Nameplate

Mounting hole 4-J: Mounting bolts

5-16
Specifications Chapter 5
Appearance 2
M: Terminal Nameplate

Mounting hole
4-J: Mounting bolts

5-2-10 Simple Input Noise Filter and Input Noise Filter

H 3G3EV-PLNFDj (Yaskawa Electric)/3G3IV-PFNj (Schaffner)

The Simple Input Noise Filter is connected


to the power input side to eliminate the noise
in the power line connected to the Inverter
and suppress noise leaking from the
Inverter to the power line.

Simple Input Noise Filter Input Noise Filter

5-17
Specifications Chapter 5

H Applicable Models
200-V class 400-V class
Maximum New model Rated Maximum New model Rated
motor ca- current motor ca- current
pacity (A) pacity (A)
(kW) (kW)
0.1 to 0.75 3G3EV-PLNFD2103DY 10 0.2 to 0.75 3G3EV-PLNFD4053DY 5
1.5 3G3EV-PLNFD2153DY 15 1.5/2.2 3G3EV-PLNFD4103DY 10
2.2 3G3EV-PLNFD2203DY 20 3.7 3G3EV-PLNFD4153DY 15
3.7 3G3EV-PLNFD2303DY 30 5.5 3G3EV-PLNFD4203DY 20
5.5 3G3IV-PFN258L4207 42 7.5 3G3EV-PLNFD4303DY 30
7.5 3G3IV-PFN258L5507 55 11 3G3IV-PFN258L4207 42
11 3G3IV-PFN258L7534 75 15/18.5 3G3IV-PFN258L5507 55
15 3G3IV-PFN258L10035 100 22 3G3IV-PFN258L7534 75
18.5/22 3G3IV-PFN258L13035 130 30 3G3IV-PFN258L10035 100
30 3G3IV-PFN258L18007 180 37/45 3G3IV-PFN258L13035 130
37/45 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 250 55 3G3IV-PFN258L18007 180
55 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 300 75/110 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 300
75 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 x 2P 500 160/185 3G3IV-PFN359P25099 x 2P 500
220 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 x 2P 600
300 3G3IV-PFN359P30099 x 2P 900

H Connection Example
3-phase input

Noise filter

5-18
Specifications Chapter 5

H Dimensions
Dimensions 1 (Three-phase Input) Dimensions 2 (Three-phase Input)

Model Figure Dimension (mm)


3G3EV- (above) W D H max. A A’ B Mounting
screw
PLNFD2103DY 1 120 80 55 108 --- 68 M4 × 4, 20 mm
PLNFD2153DY 120 80 55 108 --- 68 M4 × 4, 20 mm
PLNFD2203DY 170 90 70 158 --- 78 M4 × 4, 20 mm
PLNFD2303DY 2 170 110 70 --- 79 98 M4 × 6, 20 mm
PLNFD4053DY 170 130 75 --- 79 118 M4 × 6, 30 mm
PLNFD4103DY 170 130 95 --- 79 118 M4 × 6, 30 mm
PLNFD4153DY 170 130 95 --- 79 118 M4 × 6, 30 mm
PLNFD4203DY 200 145 100 --- 94 133 M4 × 6, 30 mm
PLNFD4303DY 200 145 100 --- 94 133 M4 × 6, 30 mm

5-19
Specifications Chapter 5
External Figure 1 External Figure 2
A J (Mounting A J (Mounting
B screw) B screw)
G
E

G
E
C
C
D

F
F F

D
H

H
External Figure 3 External Figure 4
A J (Mounting 42 210 210 42
B screw)

5040 60 60
G
E

275
300

C
Six, 9 dia.
12.5

M12 M12
160
D

F F
64

30
510
H 47 516 47

Model Figure Dimensions (mm) Weight


3G3IV- (above) A B C D E F G H J (kg)
PFN258L4207 1 329 300 325 185 70 M6 45 314 4-M5 2.8
PFN258L5507 329 300 353 185 80 M6 55 314 4-M5 3.1
PFN258L7534 2 329 300 377 220 80 M6 55 314 4-M5 4
PFN258L10035 379 350 436 220 90 M10 65 364 4-M5 5.5
PFN258L13035 439 400 486 240 110 M10 80 414 4-M5 7.5
PFN258L18007 3 438 400 480 240 110 M10 80 413 4-M5 11
PFN359P25099 4 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 16
PFN359P30099 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 16

5-20
Specifications Chapter 5

5-2-11 3G3IV-PLFj Output Noise Filter (Tokin Corp.)


Connect the 3G3IV-PLFj Output Noise Filter to the motor output side of the Inverter to prevent the
noise generated by the Inverter from flowing to the motor.

D Standard Specifications and External Dimensions


Maximum motor Inverter capacity Output Noise Filter
capacity (kW) (kVA) Model 3G3IV- Rated current (A)
200-V class 3.7 6.7 PLF320KA 20
5.5 9.5 PLF350KA 50
7.5 13 PLF350KA 50
11 19 PLF350KA x 2P 100
15 24 PLF350KA x 2P 100
18.5 30 PLF350KA x 2P 100
22 37 PLF350KA x 3P 150
30 50 PLF350KA x 3P 150
37 61 PLF3110KB x 2P 220
45 70 PLF3110KB x 2P 220
55 85 PLF3110KB x 3P 330
75 110 PLF3110KB x 4P 440
400-V class 3.7 6.1 PLF310KB 10
5.5 11 PLF320KB 20
7.5 14 PLF320KB 20
11 21 PLF335KB 35
15 26 PLF335KB 35
18.5 31 PLF345KB 45
22 37 PLF375KB 75
30 50 PLF375KB 75
37 61 PLF3110KB 110
45 73 PLF3110KB 110
55 98 PLF375KB x 2P 150
75 130 PLF3110KB x 2P 220
110 170 PLF3110KB x 3P 330
160 230 PLF3110KB x 4P 440
185 260 PLF3110KB x 4P 440
220 340 PLF3110KB x 5P 550
300 460 PLF3110KB x 6P 660

5-21
Specifications Chapter 5
D External Dimensions
Model Termi- Dimensions Weight
3G3IV- nals A B C D E F G H (kg)
PLF320KA TE-K5.5 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 x 4.5 4.5 0.6
M4 dia. dia.
PLF350KA TE-K22 260 180 180 160 120 65 7 x 4.5 4.5 2.0
M6 dia. dia.
PLF310KA TE-K5.5 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 x 4.5 4.5 0.5
M4 dia. dia.
PLF320KB TE-K5.5 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 x 4.5 4.5 0.6
M4 dia. dia.
PLF335KB TE-K5.5 140 100 100 90 70 45 7 x 4.5 4.5 0.8
M4 dia. dia.
PLF345KB TE-K22 260 180 180 160 120 65 7 x 4.5 4.5 2.0
M6 dia. dia.
PLF375KB TE-K22 540 320 480 300 340 240 9 x 6.5 6.5 12.0
M6 dia. dia.
PLF3110KB TE-K60 540 340 480 300 340 240 9 x 6.5 6.5 19.5
M8 dia. dia.

Appearance

5-22
6
Chapter 6

Appendix
6-1 Notes on Using the Inverter for a Motor
6-2 List of Parameters
Appendix Chapter 6

6-1 Notes on Using the Inverter for a Motor

H Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor


When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter, power loss is slightly higher than when operated
with a commercial power supply.
In addition, cooling effects also diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor
temperature. Therefore, the motor torque should be reduced in the low speed range.
The following graph shows the allowable load characteristics of a standard motor.
If 100% torque is continuously required in the low-speed range, use a special motor for use with invert-
ers.

Allowable Load Characteristics of Standard Motor


24% ED (or 15 minutes)
24% ED (or 15 minutes)
24% ED (or 15 minutes)

Torque (%)

Continuous

Frequency (Hz)

D High-speed Operation
When using the motor at a high speed (60 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and
bearing durability.

D Torque Characteristics
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than
when operated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to
be used with the motor to set a proper V/f pattern

D Vibration
The 3G3HV Series uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration. When the motor is operated with
the Inverter, motor vibration is almost the same as when operated with a commercial power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.
• Resonance with the natural frequency of the mechanical system
Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in
variable speed mode.
If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump
function to skip any frequency resonating the machine.
• Imbalanced rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a higher speed (60 Hz or more).

6-2
Appendix Chapter 6
D Noise
Noise is almost the same as when the motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise,
however, becomes louder when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed (60 Hz).

H Using the Inverter for Special Motors

D Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore,
an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used.
Before changing the number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped. Otherwise, the
overvoltage protective or overcurrent protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.

D Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always
select an Inverter by checking its rated output current.
When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use a cable thick enough to connect the
motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.

D Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor or increased safety-type motor is to be used, it must be subject to an
explosion-proof test in conjunction with the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-
proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.
Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.

D Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor
manufacturer. In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may
result in burning. If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz, consult with the manufac-
turer.

D Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control.
If a group of synchronous motors is individually turned ON and OFF, synchronism may be lost.

D Single-phase Motor
Do not use an inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.

H Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)


If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrica-
tion will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission
mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is oper-
ated at a speed higher than 60 Hz.

6-3
Appendix Chapter 6

H Motor Burnout Due to Insufficient Dielectric Strength of Each Phase of


the Motor
Surge occurs among the phases of the motor when the output voltage is switched. If the dielectric
strength of each phase of the motor is insufficient, the motor may burn out. The dielectric strength of
each phase of the motor must be higher than the maximum surge voltage. Normally, the maximum
surge voltage is approximately three times the power voltage imposed on the Inverter.
Be sure to connect a dedicated motor to the 400-V Inverter. A standard motor may burn out if it is con-
nected to the Inverter due to the insufficient dielectric strength of each phase of the standard motor.

6-4
Appendix Chapter 6

6-2 List of Parameters


Values in brackets [ ] are default-set values.
Note Parameters that can be changed while the Inverter is running are indicated in bold type.

H Group 1: n001 to n034


Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-
range ence
page
Parameter n001 Parameter 0: The parameters n001 can be set and 0 to 7 3-13
group selec- write prohibit checked and the parameters n002 to [1]
tion selection/Pa- n108 can be only checked.
rameter initial- The speed and direction of the Digital
ization Operator can be set.)
1: The parameters of group 1 (i.e., n001
to n034) can be set and checked and
the parameters of groups 2 and 3 (i.e.,
n035 to n049 and n050 to n108) can be
only checked.
2: The parameters of groups 1 and 2 can
be set and checked and the parame-
ters of group 3 can only be checked.
Parameter ini- 3: The parameters of groups 1, 2, and 3
tialization can be set and checked.
6: All parameters will be set to default-set
values.
7: All parameters will be initialized with a
three-wire sequence.
Note When parameter initialization is per-
formed by setting to 6 or 7, the For-
ward/Reverse rotation selection
(n005) is not initialized. (It is only ini-
tialized when a CPF4 error is
detected.)
Operation n002 Operation Selects method to input run command and 0 to 3 3-13
mode selec- mode selec- frequency reference. [3]
tion tion Run command Frequency reference
0: Digital Operator Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminals Digital Operator
2: Digital Operator Control circuit terminals
3: Control circuit terminals Control circuit terminals
Input voltage n003 Input voltage Set Inverter input voltage in 1-V units. 150.0 to 3-23
selection selection 255.0
(see note) [200.0]
Interruption n004 Interruption 0: Deceleration stop 0 to 3 3-23
mode selec- mode selec- 1: Free running stop [0]
tion tion 2: Free running stop 1 with timer. The run
command during deceleration time 1 or
2 will be ignored.
3: Free running stop 2 with timer. The
constant run command is valid. The
motor will start running after decelera-
tion time 1 or 2 passes.

Note With 400-V Inverters, the setting range upper limits and default settings are double those shown
in the table.

6-5
Appendix Chapter 6

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Motor rotation n005 Forward/Re- 0: When the forward rotation command is 0, 1 3-17
direction verse rotation input, the motor seen from the load [0]
selection selection side rotates counterclockwise.
1: When the forward rotation command is
input, the motor seen from the load
side rotates clockwise.
Note This parameter is not initialized when
parameter initialization is performed
by setting n001 to 6 or 7. (It is only ini-
tialized when a CPF4 error is
detected.)
n006 Reverse rota- 0: The motor can rotate in reverse. 0, 1 3-17
tion-inhibit 1: The motor cannot rotate in reverse. [0]
selection

6-6
Appendix Chapter 6

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Digital Op- n007 Operation 0: Inhibits Operation Mode Selection Key 0, 1 3-57
erator func- direction selec- from functioning. [1]
tion selec- tion key permit/ 1: Permits Operation Mode Selection Key
tion inhibit to function.
n008 Stop Key func- 0: The STOP/RESET Key will function 0, 1 3-58
tion selection only when the Inverter is running with [1]
the run command through the Digital
Operator.
1: The STOP/RESET Key will function
anytime.
n009 Frequency ref- 0: Permits frequency reference set with 0, 1 3-58
erence setting the Digital Operator to be valid without [1]
selection Enter Key input.
1: Permits frequency reference set with
the Digital Operator to be valid with En-
ter Key input.
V/f pattern n010 V/f pattern 0to E: Selects from 15 fixed V/f patterns. 0 to F 3-58
selection selection F: Selects optional V/f pattern with n012 [1]
to n018 settings.
n011 Rated input Set rated input voltage of motor with 1 V 150.0 to 3-60
voltage of mo- units. 255.0
tor [200.0]
(see note)
V/f pattern n012 Maximum fre- Voltage 50.0 to 3-60
selection (V)
quency (FMAX) 400.0
[60.0]
n013 Maximum volt- 0.1 to 255.0 3-60
age (VMAX) [200.0]
(see note) (See note
Frequency
(Hz)
1.)
n014 Maximum volt- 0.2 to 400.0 3-61
age frequency The V/f pattern will be a straight line if [60.0]
(FA) there is no difference between n015 and
n015 Intermediate n017 in set value, in which case the set 0.1 to 399.9 3-61
output frequen- value of n016 will be ignored. [3.0]
cy (FB)
n016 Intermediate 0.1 to 255.0 3-61
output frequen- [15.0] (See
cy voltage (VC) note 1, 2.)
(see note)
n017 Minimum out- 0.1 to 10.0 3-61
put frequency [1.5]
(FMIN)
n018 Minimum out- 0.1 to 50.0 3-61
put frequency [10.0] (See
voltage (VMIN) note 1, 2.)
(see note)

Note 1. With 400-V Inverters, the setting range upper limits and default settings are double those
shown in the table.
Note 2. The default settings for Inverters of 55 kW or more are as follows:
n016 = 12.0/24.0, n018 = 6.0/12.0

6-7
Appendix Chapter 6

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Acceleration/ n019 Acceleration The time required for the output frequency 0.0 to 3-61
Deceleration time 1 to be 100% from 0% of the maximum fre- 3,600
time selection quency. [10.0]
n020 Deceleration The time required for the output frequency 0.0 to 3-61
time 1 to be 0% from 100% of the maximum fre- 3,600
quency. [10.0]
n021 Acceleration Valid if acceleration/deceleration time 0.0 to 3-61
time 2 switching command is selected for multi- 3,600
function input. [10.0]
n022 Deceleration Valid if acceleration/deceleration time 0.0 to 3-62
time 2 switching command is selected for multi- 3,600
function input. [10.0]
S-shaped n023 S-shaped 0: No s-shaped characteristic time 0 to 3 3-62
characteristic characteristic 1: 0.2 s [1]
time selection time selection 2: 0.5 s
3: 1.0 s
Frequency n024 Unit of fre- 0: 0.1-Hz units 0 to 3,999 3-62
reference quency refer- 1: 0.1% units [0]
selection ence 2to 39: r/min
(r/min = 120 x frequency/n024
Set n024 to the number of poles of
the motor.)
40 to 3,999: Determine the display meth-
od of the maximum frequency
set with n012.
Example: Set n024 to 1100
so that “10.0” will be dis-
played at the maximum fre-
quency.
Frequency n025 Frequency Set frequency reference using the unit set0 to maxi- 3-63
reference reference 1 with n024. mum fre-
selection quency
[6.0]
n026 Frequency Frequency reference with multi-step speed 0 to maxi- 3-63
reference 2 command 1 turned ON. mum fre-
n027 Frequency Frequency reference with multi-step speed quency 3-63
reference 3 command 2 turned ON. [0.0]
n028 Frequency Frequency reference with multi-step speed 3-63
reference 4 command 1 and 2 turned ON.
n029 Inching fre- Frequency reference with inching com- 0 to maxi- 3-63
quency refer- mand turned ON. mum fre-
ence quency
[6.0]
Output fre- n030 Output fre- Set output frequency upper limit with 1% 0 to 109 3-63
quency limit quency upper units based on max. frequency set with [100]
selection limit n012 as 100%.
n031 Output fre- Set output frequency lower limit with 1% 0 to 100 3-63
quency lower units based on max. frequency set with [0]
limit n012 as 100%.

6-8
Appendix Chapter 6

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Electronic ther- n032 Motor rated Set rated input current of motor with 1-A See 3-64
mal protection current units as motor basic current for electronic note 1,
function selec- thermal protection. 2.
tion n033 Electronic ther- 0: No protection. 0 to 4 3-65
mal protection 1: For standard motors with standard rat- [1]
function selec- ings (with a time constant of 8 min).
tion 2: For standard motors with short-time rat-
ings (with a time constant of 5 min).
3: For Inverter-dedicated motors with
standard ratings (with a time constant
of 8 min).
4: For Inverter-dedicated motors with
short-time ratings (with a time constant
of 5 min).
Overheating n034 Selection of 0: Deceleration stop in deceleration time 1 0 to 3 3-65
stop mode stop method for set with n020 [3]
selection when radiation 1: Free running stop
fin overheats 2: Deceleration stop in deceleration time 2
set with n022
3: Continuous operation with warning
Note 1. Default settings vary with the Inverter model.
Note 2. The motor’s rated current setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter’s rated current.

6-9
Appendix Chapter 6

H Group 2: n035 to n049


Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-
range ence
page
Sequential in- n035 Multi-function 0: Reverse rotation/Stop 0 to 24 3-17
put function input 1 (S2) 1: Stop command (3-wire sequence [0]
selection selection)
S3 will be used for forward/reverse
rotation command and value set with
n036 will be ignored.
2: External error (NO contact: ON)
3: External error (NC contact: ON)
4: Error reset (ON: Valid)
5: Operation mode selection (ON: Digital
Operator; OFF: n002)
6: Not used
7: Emergency stop
8: Analog input selection (ON: Current
input through FI terminal; OFF: FV
terminal)
9: Multi-step speed command 1
10: Multi-step speed command 2
11: Inching command
12: Acceleration/Deceleration time
switching command
13: External baseblock command (ON:
Valid)
14: External baseblock command (OFF:
Valid)
15: Speed search command from max.
frequency
16: Speed search command from set fre-
quency
17: Parameter set-inhibit (ON: Invalid)
18: Integral value of PID control reset
command
19: PID control invalidating command
(Set point used as frequency refer-
ence)
20: Timer function input (Set with n077
and n078)
21: Inverter overheat warning (ON: “OH3”
will be displayed)
22: Analog frequency sample hold
23: Power OFF stop input (NO contact)
24: Power OFF stop input (NC contact)
n036 Multi-function Same as n035 2 to 24 3-17
input 2 (S3) [2]
n037 Multi-function Same as n035 2 to 24 3-17
input 3 (S4) [4]
n038 Multi-function Same as n035 2 to 24 3-17
input 4 (S5) [9]

6-10
Appendix Chapter 6

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Sequential in- n039 Multi-function 0to 22: Same as n035 2 to 27 3-18
put function input 5 (S6) 25: Up/Down command [10]
selection S5 will be used for the up command,
S6 will be used for the down com-
mand, and value set with n038 will be
ignored.
26: Not used. (Do not set.)
27: PID input characteristic selection
(ON: Deviation multiplied by –1)
Sequential out- n040 Multi-function 0: Error (ON: Error) 0 to 17 3-74
put function contact output 1: Running [0]
selection 1 (MA-MB-MC) 2: Frequency agreement
3: Optional frequency agreement
4: Optional frequency detection (ON:
Output frequency x n073)
5: Optional frequency detection (ON:
Output frequency x n073)
6: Overtorque (ON: Detected)
7: Overtorque (OFF: Detected)
8: Baseblock
9: Operation mode (ON: Digital Opera-
tor/Frequency reference)
10: Inverter ready
11: Timer function output (Set with n077
and n078)
12: Error retrying
13: Inverter/Motor overload warning
14: Frequency reference loss (ON: Fre-
quency reference has dropped by
90% or more within 0.4 s)
15: Not used
16: PID feedback loss (Detecting method
can be set with n093 and n094)
17: Heating heat sink (ON: OH1)
n041 Multi-function Same as n040 0 to 17 3-74
contact output [1]
2 (M1-M2)

6-11
Appendix Chapter 6

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Frequency ref- n042 Analog fre- 0: The FV terminal can be used for the 0, 1 3-77
erence function quency refer- analog frequency reference within a [0]
selection ence voltage/ voltage range from 0 to 10 VDC.
current selec- 1: The FI terminal can be used for the
tion analog frequency reference. Set the
input level with n043.
n043 FI input level 0: Voltage input within a range from 0 to 0, 1 3-78
selection 10 V. Be sure to cut jumper wire J1. [1]
1: Current input within a range from 4 to
20 mA.
n044 Analog fre- 0: Frequency reference on hold is saved 0, 1 3-78
quency refer- by n025 [0]
ence sample 1: Frequency reference on hold is not
hold selection saved.
n045 Processing 0: Inhibits Inverter from processing analog 0, 1 3-78
selection when frequency reference loss. [0]
analog frequen- 1: Permits Inverter to process analog fre-
cy reference is quency reference loss.
lost
n046 Frequency ref- Set analog frequency reference input gain. 0 to 3-79
erence gain Set input frequency at 10 V or 20 mA with 200
1% units based on max. frequency set with [100]
n012 as 100%.
n047 Frequency ref- Set analog frequency reference input bias. –100 to 3-79
erence bias Set input frequency at 0 V or 4 mA with 100
1% units based on max. frequency set with [0]
n012 as 100%.
Analog monitor n048 Multi-function 0: Output frequency (10 V: Max. frequen- 0 to 3 3-79
function selec- analog output cy n012) [0]
tion selection 1: Output current (10 V: Rated inverter
current)
2: Output power (10 V: Rated inverter out-
put capacity)
3: Main circuit DC voltage (10 V: 200-V
class: 400 V; 400-V class: 800V)
n049 Multi-function Set voltage level gain of multi-function 0.01 to 3-80
analog output analog output. 2.00
gain Set n049 to result obtained from dividing [1.00]
voltage of full analog output by 10 V.

6-12
Appendix Chapter 6

H Group 3: n050 to n108


Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-
range ence
page
Carrier frequen- n050 Carrier fre- 1: 2.5 kHz 1 to 10 3-80
cy adjustment quency 2: 5.0 kHz See
(See note 1) 3: 8.0 kHz note 2
4: 10.0 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15.0 kHz
7, 8, and 9: Varies in proportion to output
frequency up to 2.5 kHz.
10:7.0 kHz
Instantaneous n051 Selection of 0: Inverter will discontinue running. 0 to 2 3-81
power failure running after 1: Inverter will continue running if power is [0]
processing and restoration fol- supplied again within instantaneous
speed search lowing a mo- power failure compensation time set
control mentary stop with n055.
2: Inverter will always continue running
without detecting UV1 or UV3.
n052 Speed search Set current level enabling speed search in 0 to 3-82
control level 1% units based on rated output current of 200
Inverter as 100%. [110]
n053 Minimum base- Set time to start speed search after RUN 0.5 to 3-82
block time input is ON and instantaneous power fail- 10.0
ure processing starts. (See
note)
n054 V/f characteris- Set percentage of V/f characteristics for 0 to 3-82
tics during speed search. 100
speed search (See
note)
n055 Stop com- Set instantaneous power failure com- 0.0 to 3-82
pensation time pensation time in 1-s units. 2.0
(See
note)
Error retry n056 Number of er- Set number of error retries. 0 to 10 3-83
ror retries [0]
n057 Selection of er- 0: Turns ON error output while error retry 0, 1 3-83
ror output dur- is performed. [0]
ing error retry 1: Turns OFF error output while error retry
is performed.
Note 1. For a 400-V Inverter, if the carrier frequency is set to a value higher than the default setting, the
Inverter overload “OL2” detection value will decrease in consideration of an increase in the
heat that will be generated by the change in the carrier frequency.
Note 2. Default settings vary with the Inverter model.

6-13
Appendix Chapter 6

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Frequency n058 Jump fre- Set center value of jumping frequency in 0.0 to 400.0 3-83
jump quency 1 1-Hz units. [0.0]
n059 Jump fre- Frequency jump function will be invalid if 3-84
quency 2 value is set to 0.0.
n060 Jump fre- Set jump range of jumping frequency in 0.0 to 25.5 3-84
quency range 1-Hz units. [1.0]
Accumu- n061 Total operat- 0: Accumulates power-on time. 0, 1 3-84
lated opera- ing time func- 1: Accumulates running time [1]
tion time tion selection
n062 Total operat- Set accumulation start time in 1-h units. 0 to 9,999 3-84
ing time 1 Permits accumulated operation time moni- [0]
(rightmost 4 tor to function. (Same as U-11 and U-12)
digits) Accumulated operation time (h) = n063 x
n063 Total operat- 10,000 + n062 0 to 27 3-84
ing time 2 Max. value: 279,620 (h) (Returns to 0 [0]
(leftmost 2 when accumulated operation time exceeds
digits) 279,620 h)
DC braking n064 DC braking Set DC control current in 1% units based 0 to 100 3-85
current on rated output current of Inverter as [50]
100%.
n065 Stopped DC Set stop DC control time and start DC con- 0.0 to 10.0 3-85
braking time trol time in 1-s units. [0.5]
n066 Startup DC DC control will be invalid if value is set to 0.0 to 10.0 3-85
braking time 0.0. [0.0]
Torque com- n067 Automatic Set automatic torque boost gain. 0.0 to 3.0 3-85
pensation torque boost Setting is usually not necessary. [1.0]
gain
n068 Motor winding Set motor constant for automatic torque 0.000 to 3-85
resistance boost operation. 65.53
Setting is usually not necessary. (See note 1)
n069 Motor iron 0 to 9,999 3-85
loss (See note 1)
Stall preven- n070 Decelerating 0: Inhibits deceleration stall prevention 0, 1 [1] 3-86
tion stall preven- from functioning.
tion selection 1: Permits deceleration stall prevention to
function.
n071 Accelerating Set current level enabling acceleration stall 30 to 200 3-86
stall preven- prevention in 1% units based on rated out- [170] (See
tion operation put current of Inverter as 100%. note 2)
level
n072 Operating Set current level enabling operation stall 30 to 200 3-86
stall preven- prevention in 1% units based on rated out- [160] (See
tion operation put current of Inverter as 100%. note 2)
level
Optional fre- n073 Frequency Set detecting output frequency in 1-Hz 0.0 to 400.0 3-87
quency detection lev- units. [0.0]
detection el Valid if multi-function contact output is set
to optional frequency agreement or option-
al frequency detection.

Note 1. Default settings vary with the Inverter model.


Note 2. The default setting for 18.5-kW or higher Inverters is 120%.

6-14
Appendix Chapter 6

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Overtorque n074 Overtorque 0: Inhibits Inverter from detecting overtor- 0 to 4 3-87
detection detection func- que. [0]
tion selection 1: Inverter will detect overtorque only dur-
ing speed agreement and continue run-
ning with warning after detection.
2: Running Inverter will detect overtorque
and continue running with warning after
detection.
3: Inverter will detect overtorque only dur-
ing speed agreement and turn OFF
output for safety when overtorque is
detected.
4: Running Inverter will always detect
overtorque and turn OFF output for
safety when overtorque is detected.
n075 Overtorque Set overtorque detection current in 1% 30 to 3-87
detection level units based on rated output current of In- 200
verter as 100%. [160]
n076 Overtorque Set overtorque detection time in 1-s units. 0.1 to 3-87
detection time Overtorque will be detected if current larg- 10.0
er than value set with n075 flows for the [0.1]
set time or more.
Timer function n077 Timer function Set time lag between moment timer func- 0.0 to 3-88
ON delay time tion input turns ON and moment timer 25.5
function output turns ON. [0.0]
Valid if multi-function input and multi-func-
tion contact output are set to timer func-
tion.
n078 Timer function Set time lag between the moment the tim- 0.0 to 3-88
OFF delay time er function input turns OFF and the 25.5
moment the timer function output turns [0.0]
OFF.
Valid if multi-function input and multi-func-
tion contact output are set to timer func-
tion.
Braking Resis- n079 Braking resistor 0: Inhibits overheating protection from 0, 1 3-88
tor Unit over- overheating functioning. [0]
heating protec- protection 1: Permits overheating protection to func-
tion selection tion.
I/O phase loss n080 Input open- Set input phase loss detection level to per- 1 to 3-89
detection phase detec- centage of main circuit DC voltage. 100
tion level 200-V class: 200 VDC as 100% [7]
400-V class: 800 VDC as 100%
n081 Input open- Set input phase loss detection time. 2 to 3-89
phase detec- Detection time = 1.28 x n n081 255
tion time Inverter will detect input phase loss if volt- [8]
age as large as or larger than value set
with n080 is imposed continuously for peri-
od exceeding set time.
n082 Output open- Set output phase loss detection level in 0 to 3-89
phase detec- 1% units based on rated output current of 100
tion level Inverter as 100%. [0]
Output phase loss detection will be invalid
if value is set to 0.

6-15
Appendix Chapter 6

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
I/O phase loss n083 Output open- Set output phase loss detection time in 1-s 0.0 to 3-89
detection phase detec- units. 2.0
tion time Inverter will detect output phase loss if cur- [0.2]
rent as large as or less than value set with
n082 flows continuously for period exceed-
ing set time.
PID control n084 PID control 0: No PID control. 0 to 3 3-33
function selec- 1: PID control with deviation derivative [0]
tion control.
2: PID control with feedback derivative
control.
3: PID control with negative feedback
characteristic control.
n085 Feedback ad- Fine tuning gain for PID feedback value. 0.00 to 3-34
justment gain 10.00
[1.00]
n086 Proportional Set proportional gain for proportional con- 0.0 to 3-35
gain (P) trol. 10.0
Proportional control will be invalid if value [1.0]
set to 0.0.
n087 Integral time (I) Set integral time with 1 s units for integral 0.0 to 3-35
control. 100.0
Integral control will be invalid if value is set [0.00]
to 0.0.
n088 Derivative time Set derivative time with 1 s units for deriv- 0.00 to 3-35
(D) ative control. 1.00
Derivative control will be invalid if value is [0.00]
set to 0.0.
n089 PID offset ad- Set PID offset with 1% units based on –109 to 3-35
justment max. frequency set with n012 as 100%. 109
[0]
n090 Integral (I) up- Set upper limit of output with 1% units after 0 to 3-35
per limit integral control is performed based on 109
max. frequency set with n012 as 100%. [100]
n091 PID primary Set PID primary-delay time constant with 0.0 to 3-35
delay constant 1 s units for frequency reference after PID 2.5
control is performed. [0.0]
n092 Feedback loss 0: Feedback loss is detected. 0, 1 3-36
detection selec- 1: Feedback loss is not detected. [0]
tion
n093 Feedback loss Set feedback loss detection level with 1% 0 to 3-36
detection level units. 100
[0]
n094 Feedback loss Set feedback loss detection time with 1 s 0.0 to 3-36
detection time units. 25.5
[1.0]

6-16
Appendix Chapter 6

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Energy-saving n095 Energy-saving 0: Inhibits the Inverter from performing en- 0, 1 3-26
control control selec- ergy-saving control. [0]
tion 1: Permits the Inverter to perform energy-
saving control.
n096 Energy-saving Set coefficient so that maximum motor effi- 0.00 to 3-26
coefficient K2 ciency will be obtained. 655.0
(See
note)
n097 Energy-saving Set lower limits of energy-saving control 0 to 3-27
voltage lower output voltage in 1% units at 6 Hz and 120
limit for 60 Hz 60 Hz based on motor rated voltage set [50]
with n011 as 100%, in which case, lower
limit of energy-saving control output volt-
n098 Energy-saving age will be on a straight line linking values 0 to 25 3-28
voltage lower set with n097 and n098 if energy-saving [12]
limit for 6 Hz control output frequency is between 6 and
60 Hz.
n099 Mean power Set time to calculate mean output power of 1 to 3-28
time Inverter performing energy-saving control. 200
Time (ms) = 25 x n099 [1]
n100 Search control Set range of variable voltage in 1% units to 0 to 3-27
voltage limit be used by Inverter in search control mode 100
based on rated motor input voltage as [0]
100%.
Search operation function will be invalid if
n101 is set to 0.
n101 Search control Set range of variable voltage in 1% units to 0.1 to 3-28
voltage step be used by Inverter in search control mode 10.0
when 100% with 100% search operation start voltage [0.5]
based on rated motor input voltage as
100%.
n102 Search control Set range of variable voltage in 1% units to 0.1 to 3-28
voltage step be used by Inverter in search control mode 10.0
when 5% with 5% search operation start voltage [0.2]
based on rated motor input voltage as
100%.
Not used n103 Not used Do not change setting. 1 [1] ---
n104 Not used Do not change setting. 1 [1] ---
n105 Not used Do not change setting. 0 [0] ---
n106 Not used Do not change setting. 0 [0] ---
n107 Not used Do not change setting. 2 [2] ---
n108 Not used Do not change setting. 1 [1] ---

Note Default settings vary with the Inverter model.

6-17
Appendix Chapter 6

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Slip compensa- n109 Slip compensa- Slip compensation gain is set as a per- 0.0 to 3-90
tion tion gain centage of the maximum output frequency 9.9
(n014). Use the following equations to set [0.0]
a value that corresponds to the motor
rated slip.
n109 =100 ×
(Synchronization speed – rated motor
speed) ÷ synchronization speed
Synchronization speed = 120f/P
P: No. of polls
f: Rated frequency
Set n014 to the motor’s rated frequency.
Note The rated motor speed can be con-
firmed from the motor’s nameplate.
Note If n109 = 0.0, the slip compensation
function is disabled.
Note If n032 = 0.0, the slip compensation
function is disabled.
n110 Motor no-load Set the motor no-load current as a per- 0 to 99 3-90
current centage of the motor rated current (n032). [30]
Note This setting is used as a parameter of
the slip compensation function.
Note Set after confirming the motor no-
load current with the manufacturer.
Alternatively, calculate the value from
the current when there is no load and
when running at the rated frequency.
n111 Slip compensa- Slip compensation primary delay time is 0.0 to 3-90
tion primary set in s units. 25.5
delay time Note Usually setting is not necessary. Ad- [2.0]
just when slip compensation respon-
siveness is low or when speed has
not stabilized.
When responsiveness is low, de-
crease the set value.
When speed has not stabilized, in-
crease the set value.
Operation n112 Operation Set whether an error is detected when the 0, 1 3-91
selection at selection at Digital Operator is disconnected. [0]
Digital Operator Digital Operator 0: Error not detected
interruption interruption 1: Error detected
Frequency n113 Frequency Sets the width of frequency agreement 0.0 to 3-91
detection width detection width (n040, n041) and frequency detection 25.5
(n073) in Hz units. [2.0]

6-18
Appendix Chapter 6

Function No. Name Description Setting Refer-


range ence
page
Operation n114 Operation Select whether or not to ignore run signals 0, 1 3-91
selection at selection at input while the operation mode is switched [0]
operation mode operation mode using the Operation Mode Selection Key
switching (local/ switching (lo- on the Digital Operator or with operation
remote switch- cal/remote mode selection input from the multi-func-
ing) switching) tion inputs.
0: Run signals that are input during mode
switching are ignored. (Input run sig-
nals after switching the mode.)
1: Run signals become effective immedi-
ately after mode.
Note If n114 is set to 1, when the operation
mode changes the Inverter may start
running immediately. Take steps to
ensure safety for such operation.
(Manufacturer’s n115, For the manufacturer’s use. (Do not set.) See ---
use) n116 note

Note Setting ranges and default settings vary with the Inverter model.

6-19
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.

Cat. No. I515-E1-3

Revision code

The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.

Revision code Date Revised content


1 August 1996 Original production

2 April 1997 Page 1-2: Inverter model list updated. “Enclosed wall-
mounted type” replaced with “NEMA1 type.”
Pages 2-24, 2-25: Terminal names changed. New model
information reflected.
Page 1-4: Low noise and harmonic countermeasure Page 2-26: Inverter models added to the input trans-
information clarified. former table.
Page 2-4: Dimensions added for the new models. Page 2-27: New model information reflected. Information
Page 2-5: “Enclosed Wall-mounted Type” replaced with on connecting Braking Units in parallel added. Informa-
“NEMA1 Type.” tion removed from Wire Size and Solderless Terminals at
Page 2-7: Terminals U, V, and W replaced with T1 (U), the bottom of the page.
T2 (V), and T3 (W) respectively. Pages 3-3, 3-9: Terminal names changed.
Pages 2-10, 2-11: Terminals and connections changed Page 3-44: Note added.
for the 200-V Class and 400-V Class tables. New models Page 3-58: New model information reflected in the table.
reflected. Page 3-72: Notes added.
Page 2-12: Names for the three-phase terminals Pages 4-2, 4-8: Terminal names changed.
changed. Pages 4-3, 4-4: Cause and action for the heat sink over-
Page 2-13: Names for the three-phase terminals heat and Inverter overload added to.
changed. Notes added. New models reflected. Page 4-12: Inverter overload information added.
Pages 2-14, 2-15: Terminal names changed and new Pages 5-2, 5-3: Specifications completely updated.
models added. New wire sizes and tightening torque
added. Pages 5-5, 5-9, 5-10: “Control Unit” corrected to “Braking
Unit.”
Pages 2-16 to 2-20: Information for Wiring on the Input
Side of Main Circuit and Wiring on the Output Side of Pages 5-9, 5-10: New models added.
Main Circuit changed. Pages 5-15, 5-18: Noise Filter models added.
Page 2-22: Second harmonic frequency corrected. Page 6-5: New models added.
Information in Causes of Harmonics Generation cor- Page 6-13: Note added.
rected at the bottom of the page.
Page 2-23: Last sentence of DC/AC Reactors corrected.
Note added.

3 June 2000 Preliminary pages: Order changed and safety information added.
Pages 1-6, 2-33, 3-2, 3-5, 3-7, 3-16, 3-20, 3-21, 3-22, 3-38 to 3-50, 3-52, 3-56, 3-69,
3-71, 3-74, 3-80, 3-84, 5-11: Notes changed or added.
Page 1-6, 3-2: Explanation for “Operation Mode Selection Key” changed.
Page 1-7: Information on new functions added.
Pages 2-6, 2-15, 3-20, 3-31, 3-55, 5-5: Graphics changed or added.
Pages 2-7, 3-2, 4-13: “Cautions and Warnings” information changed.
Page 2-9: Information on wiring changed.
Pages 2-14, 3-5, 3-13, 3-21, 3-31, 3-38 to 3-50, 3-56, 3-62, 3-72, 3-74, 5-11, 5-13, 6-5
to 6-8: Changes made to tables.
Pages 2-20 to 2-22, 5-17 to 5-19: Major changes.
Page 2-24: Changes made to information on cable length. Information on single-phase
motors added.
Page 3-8: Information on operation modes added after table.
Page 3-23, 4-2: Information added to introduction.
Page 3-58: Setting range for n030 changed.
Page 3-61: Setting range for n039 changed.
Page 3-65: Information for external baseblock command changed.
Page 3-66: Information on PID control added.
Page 3-75: Default setting for n052 changed.
Page 3-76: Setting range for n053 changed.
Page 3-83: “Motor Rated Slip” changed to “Slip Compensation Gain.”
Page 3-84: Information for n112, n113, and n114 changed.
Page 4-4: Information on connection error added.
Page 4-12: Information added.
Pages 5-3, 5-4: “IP00” changed to “IP10.”
Index: Index removed.

R-1

You might also like